Sony | DAV-DZ640K | Sony DAV-DZ340K User manual

Sony DAV-DZ340K User manual
4-283-568-11(1)
DVD
Home Theatre
System
4-283-568-11(1)
©2011 Sony Corporation
DAV-DZ340K/DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K
Operating Instructions GB
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
AR
WARNING
Caution – The use of
optical instruments with
this product will increase
eye hazard.
Do not install the appliance in a
confined space, such as a bookcase
or built-in cabinet.
To reduce the risk of fire, do not
cover the ventilation opening of the
apparatus with newspapers,
tablecloths, curtains, etc. Do not
place the naked flame sources such
as lighted candles on the apparatus.
To reduce the risk of fire or electric
shock, do not expose this apparatus
to dripping or splashing, and do not
place objects filled with liquids,
such as vases, on the apparatus.
Do not expose batteries or
apparatus with battery-installed to
excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
To prevent injury, this apparatus
must be securely attached to the
floor/wall in accordance with the
installation instructions.
Indoor use only.
This appliance is classified as a
CLASS 1 LASER product. This
marking is located on the rear
exterior.
Precautions
On power sources
• The unit is not disconnected from
the mains as long as it is
connected to the AC outlet, even
if the unit itself has been turned
off.
• As the main plug is used to
disconnect the unit from the
mains, connect the unit to an
easily accessible AC outlet.
Should you notice an abnormality
in the unit, disconnect the main
plug from the AC outlet
immediately.
Copyrights
This system incorporates with
Dolby* Digital and Dolby Pro
Logic adaptive matrix surround
decoder and the DTS** Digital
Surround System.
* Manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, and the
double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
** Manufactured under license
under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535
& other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS
and the Symbol are registered
trademarks & DTS Digital
Surround and the DTS logos are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
includes software. © DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
This system incorporates HighDefinition Multimedia
Interface (HDMITM)
technology.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and
High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI
2GB
Licensing LLC in the United
States and other countries.
“DVD-RW,” “DVD-R,”
“DVD+RW,” “DVD+R,”
“DVD VIDEO,” and the “CD”
logos are trademarks.
“BRAVIA” is a trademark of
Sony Corporation.
“PLAYSTATION” is a
trademark of Sony Computer
Entertainment Inc.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding
technology and patents
licensed from Fraunhofer IIS
and Thomson.
Windows Media is either a
registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
This product contains
technology subject to certain
intellectual property rights of
Microsoft. Use or distribution
of this technology outside of
this product is prohibited
without the appropriate
license(s) from Microsoft.
About MPEG-4 Visual
THIS PRODUCT IS
LICENSED UNDER THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT
PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER FOR
DECODING VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL
STANDARD (“MPEG-4
VIDEO”) THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A
CONSUMER ENGAGED IN
A PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED
FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO
PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED
OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT
RELATING TO
PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND
COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG
LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://
WWW.MPEGLA.COM
All other trademarks are
trademarks of their respective
owners.
About These
Operating
Instructions
• The instructions in these
Operating Instructions
describe the controls on the
remote. You can also use the
controls on the unit if they
have the same or similar
names as those on the remote.
• The Control Menu items may
vary depending on the area.
• “DVD” may be used as a
general term for a DVD
VIDEO, DVD+RW/
DVD+R, and DVD-RW/
DVD-R.
• The default setting for menus
is underlined.
3GB
Table of Contents
Precautions.............................................. 2
About These Operating Instructions ....... 3
Playable Discs/Files on a USB
Device............................................... 5
Package Contents .................................... 9
Index to Parts and Controls................... 11
Guide to the Control Menu ................... 16
Getting Started
Step 1: Installing the System .......20
Step 2: Connecting the System ...25
Step 3: Setting up the System .....31
Playback
Playing a Disc ....................................... 34
Playing Files on a Disc/USB Device .... 34
Other Playback Operations ................... 37
Selecting the Playback Mode................ 40
Enjoying Karaoke ................................. 43
Displaying the Information of a Disc/
USB Device .................................... 45
Enjoying the Audio/Video of the
Connected Component ................... 47
Tuner
Presetting Radio Stations ...................... 48
Listening to the Radio........................... 48
Sound Effect
Selecting the Effect to Suit
the Source ....................................... 50
Convenient Functions
Using the Control for HDMI Function for
“BRAVIA” Sync ............................ 51
Transferring Songs onto a USB
Device............................................. 53
Using the Sleep Timer .......................... 56
Adjusting the Delay Between the Picture
and Sound ....................................... 56
Enjoying Multiplex Broadcast
Sound .............................................. 57
Changing the Input Level of the Sound
from Connected Components ......... 57
4GB
Settings
Changing the Brightness of the Front
Panel Display.................................. 58
Setting the Demonstration Mode to
On/Off ............................................ 58
Reperforming the Quick Setup ............. 58
Setting the System to Standby Mode
Automatically ................................. 58
Performing Further Settings ................. 59
Additional Information
Precautions ........................................... 66
Troubleshooting.................................... 68
Specifications ....................................... 75
Index ..................................................... 79
Playable Discs/Files on a USB Device
Type
Disc logo
Characteristics
DVD VIDEO
• DVD VIDEO
• DVD-R/DVD-RW in DVD VIDEO
format or video mode
• DVD+R/DVD+RW in DVD VIDEO
format
DVD VIDEO in VR
(Video Recording)
mode
• DVD-R/DVD-RW in VR (Video
Recording) mode (except for DVD-R
DL)
VIDEO CD
• VIDEO CD (Ver. 1.1 and 2.0 discs)
• Super VCD
• CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM in video CD
format or Super VCD format
CD
• Audio CD
• CD-R/CD-RW in audio CD format
DATA CD
–
• CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM in DATA CD
format that contains the following kinds
of files and conforms to ISO 96601)
Level 1/Level 2, or Joliet (extended
format):
– MP3 files2)3)
– JPEG image files4)
– Xvid/MPEG4 video files
DATA DVD
–
• DVD-ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW/
DVD+R/DVD+RW in DATA DVD
format that contains the following kinds
of files and conforms to UDF (Universal
Disk Format):
– MP3 files2)3)
– JPEG image files4)
– Xvid/MPEG4 video files
USB device
–
• USB device that contains the following
kinds of files:
– MP3 files2)3) or WMA/AAC files3)
– JPEG image files4)
– Xvid/MPEG4 video files
Icon
5GB
1)
A logical format of files and folders on CD-ROMs, defined by ISO (International Organization for
Standardization).
2)MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) is a standard format defined by ISO/MPEG for compressed audio data. MP3 files
must be in MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 format.
3)Files with copyright protection (Digital Rights Management) cannot be played by the system.
4)
JPEG image files must conform to the DCF image file format. (DCF “Design rule for Camera File system”: Image
standards for digital cameras regulated by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association
(JEITA).)
Notes on discs
This product is designed to playback discs that conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard.
DualDiscs and some music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies do not conform to the
Compact Disc (CD) standard. Therefore, these discs may not be compatible with this product.
Example of discs that the system cannot play
The system cannot play the following discs:
• CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW other than those recorded in the formats listed on page 5
• CD-ROM recorded in PHOTO CD format
• Data part of CD-Extra
• CD Graphics disc
• DVD Audio
• Super Audio CD
• DATA CD/DATA DVD that does not contain MP3 files, JPEG image files, Xvid video files, or
MPEG4 video files
• DATA CD/DATA DVD that is created in Packet Write format
• DVD-RAM
• Blu-ray Disc
Also, the system cannot play the following discs:
• A DVD VIDEO with a different region code (page 7)
• A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g., card, heart)
• A disc with paper or stickers on it
• A disc that has the adhesive of cellophane tape or a sticker stuck on it
Notes about CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW
In some cases, CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW cannot be played on this system
due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the recording
device and authoring software.
The disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalized. For more information, refer to the operating
instructions of the recording device.
Note that some playback functions may not work with some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, even if they have
been correctly finalized. In this case, view the disc by normal playback. Also, some DATA CDs/DATA
DVDs created in Packet Write format cannot be played.
6GB
Notes about Multi Session CD
• This system can play a Multi Session CD when an MP3 file is contained in the first session. Any
subsequent MP3 files recorded in later sessions can also be played.
• This system can play a Multi Session CD when a JPEG image file is contained in the first session.
Any subsequent JPEG image files recorded in later sessions can also be played.
• If MP3 files and JPEG image files in music CD format or video CD format are recorded in the first
session, only the first session will be played.
Region code
Your system has a region code printed on the rear of the unit and will only play a DVD labeled with
the same region code.
A DVD VIDEO labeled ALL will also play on this system.
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the message [Playback prohibited by area limitations.] will
appear on the TV screen. Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region code indication may be given even
though playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by area restrictions.
Notes about playback operations of a DVD or VIDEO CD
Some playback operations on a DVD or VIDEO CD may be intentionally set by software producers.
Since this system will play a DVD or VIDEO CD according to the disc contents the software producers
designed, some playback features may not be available. Be sure to read the operating instructions of
the DVD or VIDEO CD.
Notes about playable files
• The system can recognize up to 200 folders, including albums (folders) that do not contain audio files,
JPEG image files, or video files. When more than 200 folders are on the DATA CD/DATA DVD/
USB device or more than 150 files are in a folder, folders/files that are recognized by the system differ
depending on the folder configuration.
• The system can play the following files:
File
Extension of the file
MP3 file
“.mp3”
WMA file*
“.wma”
AAC file*
“.m4a”
JPEG image file
“.jpg” or “.jpeg”
Xvid video file
“.avi”
MPEG4 video file
“.mp4” or “.m4v”
* USB device only.
The system will attempt to play any data with the extensions above, even if it is not in MP3/WMA/
AAC/JPEG/Xvid/MPEG4 format. Playing this data may generate a loud noise which could damage
your speaker system.
• The following can increase the time it takes to start playback:
7GB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– when a DATA CD/DATA DVD/USB device is recorded with a complicated tree structure.
– when the audio files, JPEG image files, or video files in another folder have just been played.
Some files on DATA CDs/DATA DVDs/USB devices cannot be played by the system depending on
the file format.
The system can play to a depth of 8 folders only.
The system may not be able to play an audio file, JPEG image file, or video file depending on the file
type.
Files recorded by a device such as a computer may not be played in the order in which they were
recorded.
Folders that have no audio files, JPEG image files, or video files are skipped.
Compatibility with all MP3/WMA/AAC encoding/writing software, recording devices, and
recording media cannot be guaranteed.
Compatibility with all MPEG4 video encoding/writing software, recording devices, and recording
media cannot be guaranteed.
The playback order may not be applicable depending on the software used for creating the audio file,
JPEG image file, or video file, or if there are more than 200 folders or 150 files in each folder.
Notes about USB devices
• This system supports Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices.
• This system is not guaranteed to operate with all USB devices or memories.
• Although there are variety of complex functions for USB devices, the playable contents of USB
devices connected to the system are music, photo, and video contents only. For details, refer to the
operating instructions of the USB device.
• When a USB device is inserted, the system reads all the files on the USB device. If there are many
folders or files on the USB device, it may take a long time to finish reading the USB device.
• Do not connect the system and a USB device through a USB hub.
• With some connected USB devices, there may be a delay before an operation is performed by this
system.
• The playback order for the system may differ from the playback order of the connected USB device.
• Always turn off the system before removing a USB device. Removing the USB device while the
system is on may corrupt the data on the USB device.
• Before using a USB device, make sure that no virus-ridden files are on the USB device.
8GB
Package Contents
Main unit
Speaker packages
• DAV-DZ340K
• DAV-DZ640K
• DAV-DZ940K
• DAV-DZ840K
• Speaker cords (1 set)
(red/white/green/gray/blue)
• Foot pads (1 set)
• Wall mounting parts
For DAV-DZ340K (Indian models only)
(4)
(4)
(4)
• Speaker assembly parts for the tall round pole-type speakers
For DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K
(2)
(2)
• Speaker assembly parts for the tall full standtype speakers
For DAV-DZ840K
(2)
(2)
(6)
(4)
(2)
• Speaker assembly parts for the tall full standtype speakers
For DAV-DZ940K
(4)
(4)
(12)
9GB
Accessories
• Remote commander
(remote) (1)
• R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
• FM wire antenna (aerial) (1)
• Video cord (1)
or
• Speaker-bottom covers
For DAV-DZ840K/DAVDZ940K (2)
10GB
• Operating Instructions
• Quick Setup Guide
• Speaker Installation Guide
(DAV-DZ640K/DAVDZ840K/DAV-DZ940K
only)
• High Speed HDMI cable*
(1)
* The High Speed HDMI cable is
supplied with certain models/in
certain areas only.
Index to Parts and Controls
For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses.
Front panel
REC TO USB
A Disc tray
B Remote sensor
Receives the remote signal. Point the
remote toward here when using the remote.
C Front panel display
D Power indicator
Lights up while the system is turned on.
E VOLUME control
Adjusts the system’s volume.
F REC TO USB (page 53)
Transfers tracks/MP3 files/radio programs
onto a USB device.
Lights up during transfer of tracks/MP3
files/radio programs.
G
(USB) port (pages 29, 34)
Used for connecting a USB device.
H AUDIO IN jack (page 29)
I MIC jack (page 43)
Used for connecting a microphone.
J FUNCTION
Selects the playback source.
K Play operation buttons
Z (open/close)
Opens or closes the disc tray.
N (play)
Starts or restarts playback.
x (stop)
Stops playback and remembers the stop
point (resume point).
./> (previous/next)
Skip to the previous/next chapter, track, or
file.
L "/1 (on/standby)
Turns on the unit, or sets it to standby mode.
Used for connecting other components,
such as a portable audio source.
11GB
Rear panel
COAXIAL 75
FM
R
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA
L
TV
DIGITAL
IN
ARC
SUR R
SUR L
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
CENTER
FRONT R
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
A SPEAKERS jacks (page 25)
12GB
Y
OPTICAL
TV
OUT
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT
B TV (DIGITAL IN OPTICAL) jack (DAVDZ840K/DAV-DZ940K only) (page 26)
E COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (DAVDZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K
only) (page 26)
C TV (AUDIO IN R/L) jacks (page 26)
F VIDEO OUT jack (page 26)
D ANTENNA (COAXIAL 75Ω FM) jack
(page 30)
G HDMI OUT jack (page 26)
A THEATRE (page 51)
Remote control
THEATRE
ONE-TOUCH
PLAY
Switches to the optimum video mode for
watching movies automatically.
Depending on your TV, this function may
not work.
TV
1
BRAVIA Sync
ECHO
2
TV "/1 (on/standby)
3
Turns on your TV or sets it to standby
mode.
KARAOKE PON
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE DISPLAY
INPUT
D.TUNING MEMORY
SELECT
SOUND
MODE
"/1 (on/standby) (page 31)
DYNAMIC
BASS
9
ONE-TOUCH PLAY (page 51)
Activates One-Touch Play.
SLEEP MIC VOL KEYCON FUNCTION
4
NIGHT
Turns on the system or sets it to standby
mode.
B SLEEP (page 56)
SYSTEM PICTURE
MENU
NAVI
Sets the sleep timer.
CLEAR
ENTER
DVD
TOP MENU
DVD
MENU MUTING
ECHO (page 43)
Adjusts the level of the echo effect.
MENU
VOLUME
8
5
RETURN
KEYCON #/2 (page 43)
DISPLAY
PROG
PRESET
PROG
STEP
REPLAY ADVANCE PRESET
TUNING
SLOW
TUNING
SLOW
MIC VOL +/– (page 43)
Adjusts the microphone volume.
TOOLS
Changes the key of a song.
6
FUNCTION (pages 34, 47, 48)
Selects the playback source.
7
TV
KARAOKE PON (page 44)
Turns Karaoke Pon mode on/off.
The number 5, VOLUME +, and H buttons
have a tactile dot. Use the tactile dot as a
reference when operating the remote.
C AUDIO (page 38)
Selects the audio format/track.
SUBTITLE (page 38)
About operation of the supplied
remote
You can operate this system and a Sony TV with
the supplied remote.
x System operation
Press buttons marked with
.
x Sony TV operation
Press buttons marked with
while
pressing the TV 7 button.
THEATRE 1 and TV "/1 1 buttons are
operated directly without pressing the TV 7
button.
Note
• Depending on your TV, you may not be able to
control your TV or to use some of the buttons.
Selects the subtitle language when
multilingual subtitles are recorded on a
DVD VIDEO.
ANGLE (page 38)
Switches to other viewing angles when
multiple angles are recorded on a DVD
VIDEO.
DISPLAY (page 45)
Changes the information in the front panel
display.
INPUT
Switches your TV’s input source.
D.TUNING (page 48)
Selects radio frequencies.
13GB
MEMORY SELECT (pages 34, 53)
H DVD TOP MENU (page 39)
Opens or closes the DVD’s Top Menu.
Selects the USB device’s memory number
for playback or transfer.
D SOUND MODE (page 50)
Selects the sound mode.
DYNAMIC BASS (page 50)
Reinforces bass frequencies.
NIGHT (page 50)
Activates the night mode function.
PICTURE NAVI (page 35)
Displays the image browser for JPEG file
selection.
SYSTEM MENU (pages 48, 56, 58)
Enters the system menu.
ENTER
Enters the selected item.
E MUTING
Turns off the sound temporarily.
DVD MENU (page 39)
Opens or closes the DVD’s menu.
C/X/x/c
Moves the highlight to a displayed item.
(ENTER)
Enters the selected item.
O RETURN (page 35)
Returns to the previous display.
DISPLAY (pages 16, 31, 34, 37, 40,
43, 51, 53, 59)
Displays playback information on the TV
screen.
MENU
Displays the menu of your TV.
TOOLS
Displays the operation menu for the current
display.
I Number buttons (pages 37, 48)
VOLUME +/– (page 34)
Adjusts the volume.
F Playback operation buttons
See “Other Playback Operations”
(page 37).
CLEAR (pages 37, 40, 55)
./> (previous/next)
Selects a channel number greater than 10.
/
STEP
REPLAY/ADVANCE
m/M (fast reverse/fast forward)
/
SLOW
H (play)
X (pause)
x (stop)
Radio operation buttons
See “Listening to the Radio” (page 48).
PRESET +/–
TUNING +/–
PROG +/–
Select the TV channel.
G TV
Changes to the TV operation mode for the
remote.
14GB
Enters title/chapter numbers, radio
frequencies, etc.
Clears the entry field.
To insert the batteries
Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries (supplied) by
matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to
the markings inside the compartment.
Note
• Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid
place.
• Do not use a new battery with an old one.
• Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing,
particularly when replacing the batteries.
• If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended
period of time, remove the batteries to avoid possible
damage from battery leakage and corrosion.
15GB
Guide to the Control Menu
You can use the Control Menu to select a function and to view related information.
DISPLAY
Press
DISPLAY while using the “DVD/CD” or “USB” function.
Each time you press
DISPLAY, the Control Menu changes:
1 t 2 t 3 t 1 t ...
1 Control Menu 1
2 Control Menu 2 (appears when available)
3 Control Menu off
16GB
Control Menu
Example: Control Menu 1 when playing a DVD VIDEO.
Currently playing title number
Currently playing chapter number
Total number of titles
Total number of chapters
Control Menu items
98( 99)
13( 99)
T
0: 04: 17
OFF
OFF
DISC
TITLE
CHAPTER
Selected item
DVD VIDEO
Playback status
(N Playback,
X Pause,
x Stop, etc.)
Type of source being
played
Playing time
Current setting
Options
Function name of selected
Control Menu item
REPEAT
ENTER
Quit:
DISPLAY
Operation message
List of Control Menu items
The Control Menus 1 and 2 will show different items depending on the source. For details, see the
pages in parentheses in the chart below.
Item
Item Name, Function, Relevant Source
[TITLE] (page 37)/[SCENE] (page 37)/[TRACK] (page 37)
You can select the title, scene, or track to be played.
[CHAPTER] (page 37)/[INDEX] (page 37)
You can select the chapter or index to be played.
[TRACK] (page 37)
You can select the track to be played.
[ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST] (page 39)
When using a DVD-RW/DVD-R, you can select the playback order ([ORIGINAL] or [PLAY
LIST]).
[TIME] (page 38)
You can check the elapsed time and the remaining playback time.
You can play from a desired point by inputting the time code (DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR only).
[PROGRAM] (page 40)
You can select the track to play in the order you want.
[SHUFFLE] (page 41)
You can play the tracks/files in random order.
17GB
[REPEAT] (page 41)
You can play the entire disc/USB device (all titles/all tracks/all folders/all files) repeatedly or
one title/chapter/track/folder/file repeatedly.
[A/V SYNC] (page 56)
You can adjust the delay between the picture and sound.
[DISC MENU] (page 39)
You can display the DVD’s menu.
[BROWSING] (page 35)
You can display the list of folders/JPEG image files.
[SETUP] (page 59)
[CUSTOM]
In addition to the Quick Setup setting, you can adjust various other settings.
[QUICK] (page 31)
You can make basic adjustments.
[FOLDER] (page 37)
You can select the folder to be played.
[FILE] (page 37)
You can select the JPEG image file or video file to be played.
1)
[DATE] (page 46)
You can display the date the picture was taken by a digital camera.
1)
[INTERVAL] (page 42)
You can select the duration for which the slides are displayed on the TV screen.
1)
[EFFECT] (page 42)
You can select the effects to be used for changing slides during a slide show.
[MEDIA] (page 36)
You can select the playback priority of file types (MP3/AAC2)/WMA2) files, JPEG image
files, video files, or both MP3 and JPEG image files3)) to be played on a DATA CD/DATA
DVD/USB device.
[USB TRANSFER] (page 53)
You can transfer tracks on an audio CD or MP3 files on a DATA CD/DATA DVD onto a USB
device.
1)
These items are not displayed when playing a DATA CD/DATA DVD/USB device with video files.
2)USB
device only.
3)DATA
CD/DATA DVD only.
List of Control Menu items for karaoke
Item
Item Name, Function, Relevant Source
[KARAOKE MODE] (page 43)
Set karaoke mode to on/off.
[VOCAL SELECT] (page 44)
Selects a different set of vocals recorded in the disc.
18GB
Tip
• The Control Menu icon indicator lights up yellow
t
when you select any item except [OFF]
([PROGRAM], [SHUFFLE], [REPEAT], [A/V SYNC], [KARAOKE MODE], and [VOCAL SELECT] only). The
[ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST] indicator lights up yellow when you select [PLAY LIST] (default setting).
19GB
Getting Started
Getting Started
Step 1: Installing the System
How to position the system
Install the system by referring to the illustration below.
A
B
F
C
G
D
A Front speaker (L (left))
B Front speaker (R (right))
C Center speaker
D Surround speaker (L (left))
E Surround speaker (R (right))
F Subwoofer
G Unit
E
To attach the foot pads to the subwoofer
,
Remove the foot pads from
the protective cover.
Note
• Use caution when placing the speakers and/or speaker stands attached to the speakers on a specially treated (waxed,
oiled, polished, etc.) floor, as staining or discoloration may result.
Assembling the speakers
(DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K only)
For assembling the speakers refer to the supplied “Speaker Installation Guide.”
20GB
When installing the speakers on a wall
• Contact a screw shop or installer for information regarding the wall material or screws to be used.
• Use screws that are suitable for the wall material and strength. As a plaster board wall is especially fragile, attach
the screws securely to a beam. Install the speakers on a vertical and flat wall where reinforcement is applied.
• Sony is not responsible for accidents or damage caused by improper installation, insufficient wall strength or
improper screw installation, natural calamity, etc.
Before installing the tall full stand-type speaker on a wall
(DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K only)
Install only the upper part of the speaker.
Remove the protection sheets from the two pieces of double-sided tape on the speakerbottom cover, then attach the speaker-bottom cover to the bottom of the upper part of the
speaker.
Bottom of the upper part of
the speaker
Speaker-bottom cover
,
,
Protection sheets
Note
• When attaching the speaker-bottom cover, align it with the indentation on the bottom of the speaker.
To hang the speaker on a wall
For DAV-DZ340K (Indian models), you can select the speaker hanging method.
• To hang the speakers directly on a wall in an upright position: see the following Steps.
• To hang the front speakers on a wall at a desired angle by using the supplied wall mounting parts: see
“To install the front speakers on a wall using the wall mounting parts” (page 23).
1
Connect the speaker cord with the color tube to 3, and the speaker cord without the
color tube to #.
Color tube
Front left speaker (L): White
Front right speaker (R): Red
Center speaker: Green
Surround left speaker (L): Blue
Surround right speaker (R): Gray
21GB
Getting Started
Caution
Getting Started
2
Prepare screws (not supplied) that are suitable for the hole on the back of each speaker.
See the illustrations below.
4 mm
30 mm
3
5 mm
Hole on the back of
the speaker
10 mm
Fasten the screws to the wall, then hang the speaker on the wall.
Depth of fastened screw
8 mm to 10 mm
For the center speaker
For the tall speakers (DAV-DZ640K/DAVDZ840K/DAV-DZ940K only)
145 mm
400 mm
For the small speakers (DAV-DZ340K/
DAV-DZ640K only)
22GB
To install the front speakers on a wall using the wall mounting parts
(Indian models of DAV-DZ340K only)
Pass the speaker cord through the mounting plate, then attach the mounting plate to the
wall using commercially available screws.
Rear of the mounting
plate
Mounting plate
Screws (not supplied)
Speaker cord
slit
Speaker cord
Use the speaker cords as follows:
• Front left speaker (L): White
• Front right speaker (R): Red
2
Remove the cover from the mounting bracket, pass the speaker cord through the hole
on the rear side of the mounting bracket and out from the front side of the bracket, then
connect the speaker cord to the speaker.
Color tube
Front left speaker (L): White
Front right speaker (R): Red
,
Mounting bracket
23GB
Getting Started
1
Tightly secure the speaker to the mounting bracket with the screw (supplied).
Getting Started
3
Rear of the speaker
,
,
Screw (supplied)
4
Adjust the length of the speaker cord as you bring the shaft knob together with the
mounting plate, then insert the knob firmly until it stops.
,
Speaker cord
5
After deciding the angle, secure a screw on the lower side (1), then secure a screw on
the upper side (2).
Note
• Make sure that the wall is sufficiently thick before installing.
• Do not loosen the screws at the mounting plate or screw to secure the speaker to the mounting bracket during the
assembly process. If you do, the speaker may drop and cause an injury.
24GB
Step 2: Connecting the System
1
Connect the speaker cord with the color tube to 3, and the speaker cord without the
color tube to #.
The subwoofer speaker cord is fixed to the subwoofer.
Rear of the speaker
Color tube (+)
(–)
Connector
Note
• Do not catch the speaker cord insulation (rubber covering) in the speaker terminals.
2
Insert the connectors of the speaker cords to match the color of the SPEAKERS jacks
of the unit until they click.
L
DIGITA
IN
A
OPTIC
TR
FRON
NTER
RS
R CE
OOFE
SPEAKE
SUBW
SUR R
TL
FRON
SUR L
White
(Front left speaker (L))
Red
(Front right speaker (R))
RS
SPEAKE
Gray
(Surround right speaker (R))
TV
Green
(Center speaker)
Purple
(Subwoofer)
Blue
(Surround left speaker (L))
25GB
Getting Started
Connecting the speakers
Getting Started
Connecting your TV/set-top box
When connecting to a TV only
When connecting to a TV and set-top box
Video
1 Video
2 Audio
1 Video
2 Audio
1 Connecting the video to your TV
Depending on the jacks on your TV, select one of the connection methods.
x Method 1: Video cord (supplied) connection
This is the basic connection.
x Method 2: HDMI cable* connection
Picture quality will be improved compared to Method 1.
If your TV is compatible with the Audio Return Channel function, this connection also sends a digital
audio signal from the TV. You do not need to make a separate audio connection for listening to TV
sound. For details of the Audio Return Channel function, see “Receiving the digital audio signal of your
TV” (page 52).
x Method 3: Component video cable (not supplied) connection (DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/
DAV-DZ940K only)
Picture quality will be improved compared to Method 1.
26GB
Getting Started
IN
VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
NENT
R/CR
COMPO PB/CB P
Y
HDMI
IN
PR
Y
ARC
PB
O OUT
T VIDE
ONEN
COMP
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Method 1
(supplied)
Method 3
(not supplied)
Method 2*
* The High Speed HDMI cable is supplied with certain models/in certain areas only.
27GB
2 Connecting the audio from your TV/set-top box
Getting Started
To listen to TV or set-top box sound via the system, select one of the connection methods.
x Method 1: Audio cord (not supplied) connection
This is the basic connection and sends an analog audio signal.
x Method 2: Digital optical cord (not supplied) connection (DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K only)
Sound quality will be improved compared to Method 1.
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
T
AL OU
DIGIT
CAL
OPTI
R
AUDIO
IN
L
TV
L
DIGITA
IN
AL
OPTIC
Method 1
(not supplied)
TV
Method 2
(not supplied)
Note
• The TV (DIGITAL IN OPTICAL) jack is available on DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K only.
• The system can accept both digital and analog signals. Digital signals have priority over analog signals. If the digital
signal ceases, the analog signal will be processed after a few seconds.
• If there is no sound from an analog input when making an audio connection via an audio cord (Method 1, analog
connection) and a video connection via an HDMI cable, set [AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL] in [HDMI SETUP]
to [Off] (page 62). For details, see “Receiving the digital audio signal of your TV” (page 52).
Tip
• You can connect another component, such as a VCR, digital satellite receiver, or PlayStation, to the TV jacks
instead of your TV.
28GB
To change the color system (PAL or NTSC) (African, Asian, Indian, and
Middle Eastern models only)
1
2
Turn off the system by pressing "/1.
Turn on the system by pressing "/1 on the unit while pressing FUNCTION on the unit.
Each time you perform this operation, the color system toggles between PAL and NTSC.
“PAL” or “NTSC” appears in the front panel display.
Connecting the other components
You can enjoy connected components via the system’s speakers.
To connect:
Perform the following:
A portable audio source (not supplied)
A Use a stereo mini-plug cord (not supplied).
A USB device (not supplied)
B Directly connect the USB device, or connect via a USB
connection cable (not supplied).
B
A
To a portable audio source
29GB
Getting Started
Depending on your TV, you may be required to select either PAL or NTSC for the color system.
The initial setting for African, Indian, and Middle Eastern models is PAL.
The initial setting for Asian models is NTSC.
Getting Started
Connecting the antenna (aerial)
IAL
COAX
FM
75
A
ANTENN
or
FM wire antenna (aerial)
(supplied)
Note
• After connecting the FM wire antenna (aerial), extend and keep it as horizontal as possible.
Connecting the AC power cord (mains lead)
1
Connect the AC power cord (mains lead).
The demonstration appears in the front panel display.
Wall outlet (mains): The shape of
the wall outlet (mains) differs
depending on the area.
2
Press "/1 on the remote to turn the system on, then press "/1 again to turn off the
demonstration.
"/1
30GB
Note
• If this message does not appear, press
FUNCTION repeatedly to select “DVD/CD.” If
this message still does not appear, recall the
Quick Setup display (page 58).
5
Performing the Quick Setup
Press X/x to select a language, then
press
.
LANGUAGE SETUP
OSD:
MENU:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
Displayed items vary depending on the area and
model.
"/1
6
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
PORTUGUESE
Press X/x to select the setting that
matches your TV type, then press
.
VIDEO SETUP
16:9
TV TYPE:
16:9
PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 OUTPUT:
COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD)4:3
: PAN SCAN
AUTO
PAUSE MODE:
C/X/x/c,
• [16:9]: This aspect ratio is for a widescreen TV or a 4:3 standard TV with a
wide-screen mode (page 60).
• [4:3 LETTER BOX] or [4:3 PAN SCAN]:
This aspect ratio is for a 4:3 standard TV
(page 60).
DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
Turn on your TV.
Switch the input selector on your TV so
that the signal from the system
appears on the TV screen.
7
Press X/x to select the Control for
HDMI setting, then press
.
HDMI SETUP
AUTO(1920x1080p)
HDMI RESOLUTION:
ON
CONTROL FOR HDMI:
AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL:
ON
YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):
BCR
YCOFF
AUDIO(HDMI):
OFF
JPEG RESOLUTION:
SD
Press "/1 to turn the system on.
Press
without inserting a disc or
connecting a USB device.
Home Theatre System
Press
Press
ENTER
CLEAR
to run QUICK SETUP.
to erase this message.
• [ON]: The Control for HDMI function is
set to on.
• [OFF]: The Control for HDMI function is
set to off.
To quit the Quick Setup
Press
DISPLAY in any Step.
31GB
Getting Started
Step 3: Setting up the
System
Getting Started
Setting the type of video
output to match your TV
5
HDMI SETUP
AUTO(1920x1080p)
HDMI RESOLUTION:
CONTROL FOR HDMI:
ON
AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL:
AUTO
YCBCR
YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):
AUDIO(HDMI):
OFF
JPEG RESOLUTION:
SD
Depending on the connection of your TV
(page 26), select the type of video output of the
system.
To select the type of video signal
output from the HDMI OUT jack
When you connect the unit and your TV with an
HDMI cable, select the type of video signals
output from the HDMI OUT jack.
1
2
3
6
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“DVD/CD.”
Press X/x to select [HDMI
RESOLUTION], then press
.
HDMI SETUP
AUTO(1920x1080p)
HDMI RESOLUTION:
CONTROL FOR HDMI:
ON
AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL:
AUTO
YCBCR
YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):
AUDIO(HDMI):
OFF
JPEG RESOLUTION:
SD
Press
DISPLAY while the system is
in stop mode.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[SETUP],
CUSTOM
4
Press X/x to select [HDMI SETUP], then
press
.
Press X/x to select [CUSTOM], then
press
.
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
QUICK
7
Press X/x to select the desired setting,
then press
.
HDMI SETUP
AUTO(1920x1080p)
HDMI RESOLUTION:
CONTROL FOR HDMI: AUTO(1920x1080p)
LEVEL2
AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL: 1920x1080i
AUTO
YCBCR
1280x720p
YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):
720x480p
AUDIO(HDMI):
OFF
JPEG RESOLUTION:
SD
• [AUTO (1920 × 1080p)]: The system
outputs the optimal video signal for the
connected TV.
• [1920 × 1080i]: The system outputs 1920
× 1080i* video signals.
• [1280 × 720p]: The system outputs 1280
× 720p* video signals.
• [720 × 480p]**: The system outputs 720
× 480p* video signals.
* i: interlace, p: progressive
** Depending on the area, [720 × 480/576p] may
appear and the system may output 720 × 576p
video signals.
32GB
6
VIDEO SETUP
TV TYPE:
PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):
4:3 OUTPUT:
COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):
PAUSE MODE:
(DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAVDZ940K only)
When you connect the unit and your TV with a
component video cable, select the type of video
signals output from the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT jacks.
1
2
3
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“DVD/CD.”
7
• [OFF]: The system does not output
progressive signals. Select this setting
when:
– your TV does not accept progressive
signals, or,
– your TV is connected via jacks other
than the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
jacks.
• [ON]: The system outputs progressive
signals. Select this setting when:
– your TV accepts progressive signals,
and,
– your TV is connected via the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks.
When you select [ON], the confirmation
display appears. Follow the Steps below.
Press X/x to select [CUSTOM], then
press
.
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
QUICK
5
8
Press X/x to select [VIDEO SETUP],
then press
.
VIDEO SETUP
TV TYPE:
PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):
4:3 OUTPUT:
COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):
PAUSE MODE:
16:9
OFF
ON
FULL
AUTO
AUTO
[SETUP],
CUSTOM
4
16:9
OFF
FULL
AUTO
AUTO
Press X/x to select the desired setting,
then press
.
VIDEO SETUP
TV TYPE:
PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):
4:3 OUTPUT:
COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):
PAUSE MODE:
Press
DISPLAY while the system is
in stop mode.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
Press X/x to select [PROGRESSIVE
(COMPONENT OUT)], then press
.
Getting Started
To select the type of video signal
output from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks
16:9
OFF
FULL
AUTO
AUTO
Press C/c to select [START], then
press
.
The system outputs a progressive signal for
about 5 seconds. Check that the screen is
displayed correctly.
9
Press C/c to select [YES], then press
.
The system outputs a progressive signal.
When you select [NO], the system does not
output a progressive signal.
33GB
5
Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the
volume.
Playback
Playing a Disc
Playing Files on a Disc/
USB Device
Z
Z
FUNCTION
"/1
FUNCTION
MEMORY
SELECT
VOLUME +/–
C/X/x/c,
H
1
O
RETURN
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“DVD/CD.”
Press Z to open the disc tray.
Place a disc on the tray, then press Z.
With the label side up
4
34GB
VOLUME +/–
DISPLAY
H
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
2
3
PICTURE
NAVI
DVD MENU
Press N to start playback.
x
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
the source you want to play.
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
• “DVD/CD”: For a disc.
• “USB”: For a USB device.
2
x For a disc
To select the playback source of
the USB device
Place a disc on the tray by pressing Z to
open/close the disc tray.
You can select the memory number for playback
depending on the USB device.
Load the source.
Press MEMORY SELECT.
x For a USB device
Selected memory number
(USB)
USB Memory 2 selected.
Home Theatre System
Playback
Connect a USB device to the
port.
Note
USB device
Note
• It may take about 10 seconds before
“READING” appears in the front panel display
depending on the type of USB device.
[FOLDER LIST] appears on the TV screen.
If [FOLDER LIST] does not appear, press
DVD MENU.
3
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Let's Talk About Love (1985)
1st Album (1986)
In the Middle of Nowhere (1986)
Ready for Romance (1986)
In the Garden of Venus (1987)
Romantic Warriors (1987)
Back for Good (1988)
Alone (1999)
Press N to start playback.
x For video or audio files
The system starts playback of files in the
selected folder.
x For JPEG image files
The system starts a slide show of files in the
selected folder.
5
To remove the USB device
1
2
3
Press x to stop playback.
Press [/1 to turn off the system.
Remove the USB device.
Press X/x to select a folder.
FOLDER LIST
4
• When the memory cannot be selected, [Operation not
possible.] appears on the TV screen.
• The memory number changes depending on the USB
device.
Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the
volume.
Playing a specific file
1
2
3
Select a folder by following Steps in
“Playing Files on a Disc/USB Device”
(page 34).
Press
to display the file list.
Select a file.
To return to the folder list, press O
RETURN.
x For video or audio files
Press X/x to select a file.
TRACK LIST
03 In the Middle of Nowher...
01_Geronimo_s_Cadillac
02_Riding_On_A_White_Swan
03_Give_Me_Peace_On_Earth
04_Sweet_Little_Shella
05_Ten_Thousand_Lonely_Drums
06_Lonely_Tears_In_Chinatown
07_In_Shaire
35GB
x For JPEG files
Press C/X/x/c to select an image.
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
When different file types are
on a disc/USB device
You can select the file type that is played with
priority when mixed media (audio files, JPEG
image files, or video files) are on the disc/USB
device.
1
2
Start playback.
x For video or audio files
Press N to start playback from the selected
file.
x For JPEG image files
Press N to start a slide show beginning
with the selected file. Press
to display
only the selected file.
To display the thumbnail list of
JPEG image files
Press PICTURE NAVI.
To turn on/off the list of folders/
files
Press DVD MENU.
To display the list of folders/files
using the Control Menu
1
2
3
Press
DISPLAY.
Press X/x to select
[BROWSING], then press
.
Press X/x to select the desired list,
then press
.
• [FOLDER LIST]: A list of folders
appears. To display a list of files, press X/
x to select a folder, then press
.
• [PICTURE LIST] (JPEG image files
only): A thumbnail list of the JPEG image
files in the folder appears.
36GB
3
Press
DISPLAY.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[MEDIA],
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
• [MUSIC/PHOTO] (DATA CD/DATA
DVD only): You can play both JPEG
image files and MP3 files in the same
folder as a slide show.
• [MUSIC]: Audio file playback has
priority.
• [VIDEO]: Video file playback has
priority.
• [PHOTO]: JPEG image file playback has
priority. You can play JPEG image files as
a slide show.
The default setting differs depending on the
source.
For details of the playback priority of file
types under the [MEDIA] setting, see
“Playback Priority of File Types”
(page 77).
Other Playback
Operations
Press
Play one frame at a X, then press
STEP or
time (freeze frame) STEP.
•
STEP: go to the preceding
frame.
•
STEP: go to the next
frame.
Replay the previous
scene or briefly fast •
forward the current •
scene
or
during playback.
: 10 seconds before.
: 30 seconds ahead.
or
Depending on the type of disc/file, the function
may not work.
Go to the previous
or next page when a
list of folders/files
has multiple pages
To
Rotate a JPEG
image file
Press
Stop
x.
Pause
X.
N.
Return to normal
playback or resume
playback after
pause
Cancel the resume
point
x twice.
Skip the current
. or >.
chapter, track, file, • .: go to the beginning.
or scene
• Press . twice in a second to
go to the previous item.
• >: go to the next item.
Skip the current
JPEG image file
C or c during playback.
• C: go to the previous file.
• c: go to the next item.
Locate a point
quickly
/m or M/
while
playing a disc.
•
/m: fast reverse scan.
• M/
: fast forward scan.
Each time you press
/m or
M/
during scanning, the
scan speed changes.
Watch frame by
frame
X, then press
/m or M/
.
•
/m: slow-motion play
(reverse).
• M/
: slow-motion play
(forward).
Each time you press
/m or
M/
during slow-motion
play, the playback speed
changes.
.
Playback
Playback operation buttons on
the remote
To
X/x while viewing a JPEG
image file.
Press CLEAR to return to
normal view.
Tip
• When playing files, you can select the next folder by
continuing to press > (c for JPEG image files)
after the last file on the current folder, but you cannot
return to the previous folder by pressing .(C for
JPEG image files). To return to the previous folder,
select the folder from the folder list.
• You cannot rotate JPEG image files when you set
[JPEG RESOLUTION] in [HDMI SETUP] to [(1920
× 1080i) HD
] or [(1920 × 1080i) HD] (page 62).
Playing a specific title/
chapter/track/scene, etc.
To select the title/chapter/track/
scene/index/folder/file number for
playback
1
2
Press
DISPLAY.
Press X/x to select the search method,
then press
.
•
•
•
•
•
[TITLE/SCENE/TRACK]
[CHAPTER/INDEX]
[TRACK]
[FOLDER]
[FILE]
37GB
Example:
[CHAPTER]
[** (**)] is selected (** refers to a number).
The number in parentheses indicates the
total number of titles, chapters, tracks,
indexes, scenes, folders, or files.
98( 99)
13( 99)
T
0: 03: 17
DVD VIDEO
Note
• If [MEDIA] is set to [MUSIC/PHOTO] and
[FILE] does not appear, press
DISPLAY again.
Press X/x or the number buttons to
select the desired number of the title,
chapter, track, scene, etc., then press
.
98( 99)
13( 99)
T
0: 03: 17
DVD VIDEO
If you make a mistake, press CLEAR to
cancel the number.
To select a scene using the time
code
1
2
3
Press
Displaying subtitles
Changing the audio
Press AUDIO repeatedly during playback to
select the sound.
x DVD VIDEO
You can toggle audio format or language when
the source contains multiple audio formats or
multilingual audio.
When 4 digits are displayed, they indicate a
language code. See “Language Code List”
(page 78) to confirm which language the code
represents.
When the same language is displayed two or
more times, the DVD VIDEO is recorded in
multiple audio formats.
Example:
Dolby Digital 5.1 channel
Surround (L/R)
DISPLAY.
Press X/x to select
press
.
Press ANGLE during playback to select the
desired angle.
Press SUBTITLE during playback to select
the desired subtitle language.
Selected row
3
Changing angles
[TIME], then
Input the time code using the number
buttons, then press
.
1: ENGLISH
Front (L/R) +
Center
For example, to find a scene at 2 hours, 10
minutes, and 20 seconds after the
beginning: press 2, 1, 0, 2, 0 ([2:10:20]).
Note
• You cannot search for a scene on a DVD+RW using
the time code.
38GB
LFE (Low
Frequency Effect)
DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 .1
L
C
R
LFE
LS
RS
Currently playing program format
x DVD-VR
You can toggle audio tracks when a disc
contains multiple audio tracks.
x VIDEO CD/CD/DATA CD (MP3 file)/DATA
DVD (MP3 file)/USB device (audio file)
You can change the sound track.
• [STEREO]: The stereo sound.
• [1/L]: The sound of the left channel
(monaural).
• [2/R]: The sound of the right channel
(monaural).
You can toggle audio tracks when a video file
contains multiple audio tracks.
x Super VCD
You can change the sound track.
• [1:STEREO]: The stereo sound of audio track
1.
• [1:1/L]: The sound of the left channel of audio
track 1 (monaural).
• [1:2/R]: The sound of the right channel of
audio track 1 (monaural).
• [2:STEREO]: The stereo sound of audio track
2.
• [2:1/L]: The sound of the left channel of audio
track 2 (monaural).
• [2:2/R]: The sound of the right channel of
audio track 2 (monaural).
3
Press X/x to select
MENU], then press
[DISC
.
Press X/x to select [MENU] or [TOP
MENU], then press
.
Selecting an original title or
edited title on a DVD-VR
This function is only available for DVD-VRs
with a playlist created.
1
2
3
Playback
x DATA CD (Xvid video file)/DATA DVD
(Xvid video file)/USB device (Xvid video
file)
2
Press
DISPLAY while the system is
in stop mode.
Press X/x to select
PLAY LIST], then press
[ORIGINAL/
.
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
• [PLAY LIST]: You can play the titles in
the order of the existing playlist.
• [ORIGINAL]: You can play the titles as
they were originally recorded.
Using the DVD’s menu
When you play a DVD which contains several
titles, you can select the title you want using
DVD TOP MENU.
When you play a DVD that allows you to select
items such as the language for the subtitles and
the language for the sound, select these items
using DVD MENU.
1
2
Press DVD TOP MENU or DVD MENU.
Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to
select the item you want to play or
change, then press
.
To display the DVD’s menu on the
Control Menu
1
Press
DISPLAY.
39GB
Selecting the Playback
Mode
5
Select the track you want to program.
Ex. To set track 2 as the first
programmed track
Press X/x to select [02] under [T], then
press
.
Selected track
Playing in programmed order
PROGRAM
(Program Play)
ALL CLEAR
1. TRACK
2. TRACK
3. TRACK
4. TRACK
5. TRACK
6. TRACK
7. TRACK
You can play the contents of a disc in the order
you want by arranging the order of the tracks on
the disc to create your own program. You can
program up to 99 tracks.
1
2
3
Press
Track number [T]
0: 03:51
T
02
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
01
02
03
04
05
06
Total time of the programmed tracks
DISPLAY.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[PROGRAM],
6
Press X/x to select [SET
press
.
t], then
7
To program other tracks, repeat Steps
4 to 5.
Press N to start Program Play.
To return to normal playback
Total time of the programmed tracks
PROGRAM
ALL CLEAR
1. TRACK
2. TRACK
3. TRACK
4. TRACK
5. TRACK
6. TRACK
7. TRACK
0: 00:00
T
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
01
02
03
04
05
06
Press CLEAR when the display for the program
setting is not displayed on the TV screen, or
select [OFF] in Step 3. To play the same
program again, select [ON] in Step 3 and press
.
To change or cancel a program
1
Tracks recorded on a disc
4
2
Press c.
The cursor moves to the track row [T] (in
this case, [01]).
PROGRAM
ALL CLEAR
1. TRACK
2. TRACK
3. TRACK
4. TRACK
5. TRACK
6. TRACK
7. TRACK
0: 00:00
T
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
Follow Steps 1 to 3 of “Playing in
programmed order.”
Press X/x to select the program
number of the track you want to
change or cancel.
If you want to delete the track from the
program, press CLEAR.
3
––
01
02
03
04
05
06
Follow Step 5 of “Playing in
programmed order” for new
programming.
To cancel a program, select [--] under [T],
then press
.
To cancel all of the tracks in the
program
1
2
40GB
Follow Steps 1 to 3 of “Playing in
programmed order.”
Press X and select [ALL CLEAR], then
press
.
Playing in random order
(Shuffle Play)
Playing repeatedly
(Repeat Play)
Note
1
2
3
Press
DISPLAY during playback.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[SHUFFLE],
1
2
3
Press X/x to select the item to be
shuffled.
[REPEAT],
Press X/x to select the item to be
repeated, then press
.
• [OFF]: Off.
• [DISC]: You can repeat all of the titles on
the disc.
• [TITLE]: You can repeat the current title
on a disc.
• [CHAPTER]: You can repeat the current
chapter on a disc.
• [OFF]: Off.
• [TRACK]: You can shuffle tracks on the
disc.
x During Program Play
• [OFF]: Off.
• [ON]: You can shuffle tracks selected in
Program Play.
x VIDEO CD/CD
• [OFF]: Off.
• [DISC]: You can repeat all of the tracks
on the disc.
• [TRACK]: You can repeat the current
track.
x DATA CD (audio files only)/DATA
DVD (audio files only)/USB device
(audio files only)
• [OFF]: Off.
• [ON (MUSIC)]: You can shuffle audio
files in the folder on the current disc/USB
device. When no folder is selected, the
audio files in the first folder are shuffled.
Press
DISPLAY during playback.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
x DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR
x VIDEO CD/CD
4
Press
Playback
• The same song may be played repeatedly when you
are playing MP3 files.
x DATA CD/DATA DVD/USB device
• [OFF]: Off.
• [DISC] (DATA CD/DATA DVD only):
You can repeat all of the folders on the
disc.
• [MEMORY] (USB device only): You can
repeat all of the folders on the USB
device.
• [FOLDER]: You can repeat the current
folder.
• [TRACK] (audio files only): You can
repeat the current file.
• [FILE] (video files only): You can repeat
the current file.
to start Shuffle Play.
To return to normal playback
Press CLEAR, or select [OFF] in Step 3.
Note
• You cannot use Shuffle Play with a VIDEO CD or
Super VCD with PBC playback.
4
Press N to start Repeat Play.
To return to normal playback
Press CLEAR, or select [OFF] in Step 3.
Note
• You cannot use Repeat Play with a VIDEO CD or
Super VCD with PBC playback.
41GB
Selecting an effect for the
slide show
1
2
3
3
• [NORMAL]: Slide show images appear
for the standard duration.
• [FAST]: You can set the duration shorter
than [NORMAL].
• [SLOW 1]: You can set the duration
longer than [NORMAL].
• [SLOW 2]: You can set the duration
longer than [SLOW 1].
Press
DISPLAY repeatedly until
[EFFECT] appears on the
control menu.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[EFFECT],
Note
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
• [MODE 1]: The JPEG image file sweeps
in from the top to the bottom of the TV
screen.
• [MODE 2]: The JPEG image file stretches
out from the left to the right of the TV
screen.
• [MODE 3]: The JPEG image file stretches
out from the center of the TV screen.
• [MODE 4]: The JPEG image files
randomly cycle through the effects.
• [MODE 5]: The next JPEG image file
slides over the previous image.
• [OFF]: Off.
• Some JPEG image files may take longer to display
than the option you selected, especially progressive
JPEG image files or JPEG image files of 3,000,000
pixels or more.
• The [INTERVAL] setting cannot be selected when
you are playing a disc that does not contain JPEG
image files or a USB device, or when you set
[MEDIA] to a setting that cannot play JPEG image
files.
Playing a slide show with
sound
1
Note
• The [EFFECT] setting is not effective when you set
[JPEG RESOLUTION] in [HDMI SETUP] to [(1920
× 1080i) HD
] or [(1920 × 1080i) HD] (page 62).
• The [EFFECT] setting cannot be selected when you
are playing a disc that does not contain JPEG image
files or a USB device, or when you set [MEDIA] to a
setting that cannot play JPEG image files.
Selecting the slide show
duration
1
2
42GB
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
Press
DISPLAY repeatedly until
[INTERVAL] appears on the
control menu.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
Prepare a folder on a disc which
contains both MP3 files and JPEG
image files.
The MP3 files and JPEG image files must
not be in separate folders. For details of
making the disc, refer to the instructions of
your PC, software, etc.
2
3
4
5
Press
DISPLAY.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[MEDIA],
When [MUSIC/PHOTO] is selected, go
to Step 5. When other than [MUSIC/
PHOTO] is selected, press X/x to select
[MUSIC/PHOTO], then press
.
If the folder list does not appear, press
DVD MENU.
You can turn the folder list on/off by
pressing DVD MENU repeatedly.
[INTERVAL],
6
Press X/x to select the desired folder
and press N.
To cancel karaoke mode
Note
• If you play a large MP3 file and JPEG image file at
the same time, the sound may skip. Sony
recommends that you set the MP3 bit rate to 128 kbps
or lower when creating the file. If the sound still
skips, reduce the size of the JPEG image file.
1
Plug a microphone into the MIC jack.
Note
• Before connecting, press MIC VOL – to set the
microphone volume to minimum.
• Microphone sound is not output when:
– the microphone is not connected to the unit
properly.
– the microphone volume is set to minimum.
– you use a microphone other than the monaural
dynamic type.
• When you set the system to karaoke mode while
playing a VIDEO CD/CD/MP3 file, the sound track
(page 38) is set to [1/L] automatically.
Playback
Enjoying Karaoke
Disconnect the microphone, or set [KARAOKE
MODE] to [OFF].
Tip
• The karaoke play is performed with the audio channel
you selected using AUDIO (page 38).
To add an echo effect
Press ECHO repeatedly.
Each time you press ECHO, the echo level
changes as follows:
“ECHO OFF” t “ECHO 1”
R
r
“ECHO 3” T “ECHO 2”
The system enters karaoke mode.
2
3
Start audio playback following the
Steps in “Playing a Disc” (page 34) or
“Playing Files on a Disc/USB Device”
(page 34).
Sing along to the audio.
Press MIC VOL +/– to adjust the
microphone volume.
To set the system to karaoke
mode without the microphone
connected
1
Press
To cancel the echo effect, select “ECHO OFF.”
Note
• If howling occurs:
– Move the microphone away from the speakers.
– Lower the microphone volume or echo level.
– Lower the overall volume.
Changing the key of a song
(Key Control)
DISPLAY.
Note
• The Control Menu will not appear if no disc/
USB device is inserted into the unit.
2
3
Press X/x repeatedly to select
[KARAOKE MODE], then press
.
Press X/x to select [ON], then press
.
You can change the key to suit your vocal range,
except when the system is in stop mode.
Press KEYCON #/2 to suit your vocal range
in karaoke mode.
You can adjust the key lower or higher in
13 steps (26 – #6).
43GB
3
Note
• Depending on the source, you may not be able to
change the key.
• The key may return to the original key automatically
if you operate the system or the status of the system is
changed.
Press X/x repeatedly to select the
desired vocal channel.
x DVD VIDEO
•
•
•
•
Reducing the vocal sound of a
non-karaoke source (Karaoke
Pon)
[OFF]: The guide vocal is canceled.
[1+2]: Guide vocal 1+2 is output.
[1]: Guide vocal 1 is output.
[2]: Guide vocal 2 is output.
x VIDEO CD/CD
• [OFF]: The guide vocal is canceled.
• [L+R]: The same sound is output from
both speakers.
• [STEREO]: The standard stereo sound is
output.
x Super VCD
You can enjoy karaoke with a stereo-recorded
source, even if it is a non-karaoke source, by
reducing the sound of the vocals.
• [OFF]: The guide vocal is canceled.
• [1:L+R]: The same sound of audio track 1
is output from both speakers.
• [1:STEREO]: The stereo sound of audio
track 1 is output.
• [2:L+R]: The same sound of audio track 2
is output from both speakers.
• [2:STEREO]: The stereo sound of audio
track 2 is output.
Press KARAOKE PON in karaoke mode.
To cancel Karaoke Pon mode
Press KARAOKE PON again.
Note
• This function may not work well depending on the
source.
• Karaoke Pon mode may be canceled automatically if
you operate the system.
When playing a karaoke DVD recorded in
Dolby Digital format in karaoke mode, you can
turn on or off the guide vocal recorded in the
karaoke track.
When playing a VIDEO CD/CD in karaoke
mode, you can listen to the vocals.
You can also change the guide vocal channel to
select different kinds of vocals.
44GB
Press
DISPLAY in karaoke mode.
Press X/x repeatedly to select
[VOCAL SELECT], then press
Press
.
Note
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to change
the guide vocal channel.
• The channel may return to the default setting if you
operate the system.
Selecting the vocals (Vocal
Select)
1
2
4
.
About karaoke DVDs recorded
in Dolby Digital format
On karaoke DVDs recorded in Dolby Digital
format, guide melody and guide vocal tracks are
recorded in addition to the accompaniment. You
can select an accompaniment, guide melody, or
guide vocal track when the system is in karaoke
mode.
Accompaniment
Accompaniment
Front
(L)
Front
(R)
Center
Guide melody
Guide vocal 1
Surround
(R)
Viewing playback information
Guide vocal 2
You can select any of these. These are output
from the respective speakers.
You can check the audio information by
pressing AUDIO (page 38). When playing a
karaoke DVD, [ ] appears as the current audio
format.
Press DISPLAY repeatedly during
playback.
Information on the TV screen
1
Example:
1: ENGLISH
Playback
Surround
(L)
Displaying the
Information of a Disc/
USB Device
T
0: 13
2
3
192k MP3
DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2
2/0: Recorded only with
accompaniment.
3/0: Recorded with guide melody.
3/1: Recorded with guide melody and
one guide vocal.
3/2: Recorded with guide melody and
two guide vocals.
4, 5
Dvorak/Tchaikovsky/NedPho/Kreizberg
Adagio - Allegro molto
1 [T **:**:**/C **:**:**/D **:**:**]
Playing time of the current item
“T” stands for title/track, “C” stands for
chapter, and “D” stands for disc.
[T-**:**:**/C-**:**:**/D-**:**:**]
Remaining time of the current item
“T” stands for title/track, “C” stands for
chapter, and “D” stands for disc.
[**:**:**]
Playing time of the current scene/video file
2 Bit rate
Appears when playing an audio file.
3 File type
Appears when playing an audio/video file.
4 Folder/file name
Appears when playing an audio file/JPEG
image file/video file.
If an MP3 file has an ID3 tag, the system
will display an album name/title name from
45GB
the ID3 tag information.
The system can support ID3 ver 1.0/1.1/2.2/
2.3.
ID3 ver 2.2/2.3 tag information display has
priority when both ID3 ver 1.0/1.1 and ver
2.2/2.3 tags are used for a single MP3 file.
5 Text information
The DVD/CD text appears only when text
is recorded on the disc. You cannot change
the text. If the disc does not contain text,
“NO TEXT” appears.
Note
• Depending on the source being played, the system
can only display a limited number of characters. Also,
depending on the source, not all text characters will
be displayed.
Information in the front panel
display
Each time you press DISPLAY during playback,
the following information appears.
Some displayed items may disappear after a few
seconds.
x DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR
1 Playing time of the current title
2 Remaining time of the current title
3 Playing time of the current chapter
4 Remaining time of the current chapter
5 Disc name
6 Title and chapter
x VIDEO CD (with PBC functions)/Super
VCD (with PBC functions)
1 Playing time of the current item
2 Disc name
3 Scene number
x DATA CD/DATA DVD/USB device (audio
file)
1 Playing time and current track number
2 Track (file) name*
* If an MP3 file has an ID3 tag, the system will
display a title name from the ID3 tag information.
The system can support ID3 ver 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3.
ID3 ver 2.2/2.3 tag information display has priority
when both ID3 ver 1.0/1.1 and ver 2.2/2.3 tags are
used for a single MP3 file.
x DATA CD (video file)/DATA DVD (video
file)/USB device (video file)
1 Playing time of the current file
2 Current file name
3 Current album and file number
Note
• The system can only display the first level of the
DVD/CD text, such as the disc name or title.
• The disc name or track name may not be displayed
depending on the text.
• Playing time of MP3 files and video files may not be
displayed correctly.
Viewing the date information
of a JPEG image file
You can check the date information during
playback when the Exif* tag is recorded in the
JPEG image file.
Press
DISPLAY repeatedly until
[DATE] appears on the control menu.
5(
8)
10( 15)
18/9/2002
DATA CD
x VIDEO CD (without PBC functions)/CD
1 Playing time of the current track
2 Remaining time of the current track
3 Playing time of the disc
4 Remaining time of the disc
5 Track name
6 Track and index*
* VIDEO CD only.
x Super VCD (without PBC functions)
1 Playing time of the current track
2 Track text
3 Track and index number
46GB
Date information
* “Exchangeable Image File Format” is a digital
camera image format defined by the Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
Enjoying the Audio/Video
of the Connected
Component
1
Operate the connected component.
To enjoy a set-top box, select the input of
the set-top box via the TV to which it is
connected.
Playback
FUNCTION
3
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
the desired function.
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
2
Function
Source
“DVD/CD”
Disc that is played by the
system
“FM”
FM radio
“USB”
USB device
“TV”
TV or set-top box
“AUDIO IN”
Portable audio source that
is connected to the AUDIO
IN jack on the front panel
Prepare the source.
• “DVD/CD”: Insert a disc into the unit
(page 34).
• “FM”: Select a radio program (page 48).
• “USB”: Connect a USB device directly
(page 34).
• “TV”: Select a channel on the TV or settop box.
• “AUDIO IN”: Connect a portable audio
source via an audio cord (stereo mini-plug
cord) (page 29).
47GB
To change the preset number
Tuner
Presetting Radio
Stations
You can preset 20 FM stations.
Current station
Current band and preset number
Select the desired preset number by pressing
PRESET +/– (page 48), then perform the
procedure from Step 3.
Listening to the Radio
Preset radio stations in the system’s memory
first (see “Presetting Radio Stations” (page 48)).
1
FM
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
FM 10 : 88.00 MHz
2
1
2
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“FM.”
6
3
Press PRESET +/– repeatedly to select
the preset station.
Adjust the volume by pressing
VOLUME +/–.
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
To listen to radio stations when
you know the frequencies
Press and hold TUNING +/– until the
auto scanning starts.
Press D.TUNING in Step 2, press the number
buttons to select the frequencies, then press
.
Scanning stops when the system tunes in a
station.
3
4
5
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“FM.”
Press SYSTEM MENU.
To listen to non-preset radio
stations
A preset number appears in the front panel
display.
Use manual or automatic tuning in Step 2.
For manual tuning, press TUNING +/–
repeatedly.
For automatic tuning, press and hold TUNING
+/–. The automatic tuning stops automatically
when the system receives the radio station. To
stop the automatic tuning manually, press
TUNING +/– or x.
Press X/x to select the preset number
you want.
If an FM program is noisy
Press X/x to select “MEMORY.”
Press
or c.
If an FM program is noisy, you can select
monaural reception. There will be no stereo
effect, but reception will improve.
7
Press
.
“COMPLETE” appears in the front panel
display, and the station is stored.
8
9
48GB
Repeat Steps 2 to 7 to store other
stations.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
1
2
3
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Press X/x to select “FM MODE.”
Press
or c.
4
Press X/x to select “MONO.”
• “STEREO”: Stereo reception.
• “MONO”: Monaural reception.
5
6
Press
.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Tip
Tuner
• You can check the frequency using the front panel
display. Each time you press DISPLAY, the display
changes as follows:
1 Frequency
Ex. “12 87.50”
2 The “FM MODE” setting
Ex. “STEREO”
49GB
Sound Effect
Selecting the Effect to
Suit the Source
Reinforcing bass frequencies
Press DYNAMIC BASS.
“BASS ON” appears in the front panel display.
To turn off the sound effect
Press DYNAMIC BASS again.
The system has six pre-programmed sound
modes to suit the source or playback situation.
You can achieve the maximum sound effect of
the original source by simply selecting one of
the sound modes.
Press SOUND MODE repeatedly until the
desired mode appears in the front panel
display.
• “STANDARD”: The system automatically
selects a sound effect suitable for movies or
music, depending on the source.
• “CLEAR VOICE”: The system outputs sound
using dialog enhancement for voices that are
easier to hear.
• “MOVIE”: The system outputs sound suitable
for movies. If the original source is 2 channel,
the system simulates surround sound by using
the Dolby Pro Logic decoding system, and
outputs the sound from all speakers.
• “HI-FI”: The system outputs sound suitable
for music. You can enjoy the accurate sound of
the original source.
• “BGM”: The system outputs the same sound
across the entire room. You can enjoy this
mode, for example, in the large party room.
• “2CH STEREO”: The system outputs sound
from the front speakers and the subwoofer
regardless of the original numbers of channels.
If the original source is multi-channel, the
system downmixes it to 2 channels.
Note
• Depending on the source, the sound mode may not be
effective.
50GB
Enjoying sound quietly
You can compress the dynamic range of nondialog sound. This effect is useful for watching
movies at night.
Press NIGHT.
“NIGHT ON” appears in the front panel display.
To turn off the sound effect
Press NIGHT again.
1
Convenient Functions
Using the Control for
HDMI Function for
“BRAVIA” Sync
3
4
Turn on your TV and press [/1 to turn
on the system.
Switch the input selector on your TV so
that the signal from the system through
the HDMI input appears on the TV
screen.
Set the Control for HDMI function of
your TV.
For details of the setting of your TV, refer
to the operating instructions of your TV.
5
On the system, press FUNCTION
repeatedly to select “DVD/CD.”
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
6
7
8
Press
DISPLAY while the system is
in stop mode.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[SETUP],
Press X/x to select [CUSTOM], then
press
.
Control for HDMI is a mutual control function
standard used by CEC (Consumer Electronics
Control) for HDMI (High-Definition
Multimedia Interface).
9
Note
11 Press X/x to select [ON], then press
• Depending on the connected component, the Control
for HDMI function may not work. Refer to the
operating instructions of the component.
Preparing the Control for HDMI
function
(Control for HDMI - Easy Setting)
If your TV is compatible with the Control for
HDMI - Easy Setting function, you can set the
system’s [CONTROL FOR HDMI] function
automatically by setting your TV. For details,
refer to the operating instructions of your TV.
If your TV is not compatible with the Control for
HDMI - Easy Setting function, set the Control
for HDMI function of the system and TV
manually.
Convenient Functions
This function is available on TVs with the
“BRAVIA” Sync function.
By connecting Sony components that are
compatible with the Control for HDMI function
with an HDMI cable, operation is simplified as
below:
– System Power Off (page 51)
– One-Touch Play (page 52)
– Theatre Mode (page 52)
– System Audio Control (page 52)
– Audio Return Channel (page 52)
– Remote Easy Control (page 52)
– Language Follow (page 52)
2
Make sure that the system and your TV
are connected with an HDMI cable.
Press X/x to select [HDMI SETUP], then
press
.
10 Press X/x to select [CONTROL FOR
HDMI], then press
.
.
Turning the system off in sync
with your TV
(System Power Off)
When you turn your TV off by using the
POWER button on your TV’s remote or TV [/1
on the system’s remote, the system turns off
automatically.
Note
• This function depends on the settings of your TV. For
details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV.
• Depending on the status of the system (ex. while
playing a CD or listening to the radio), the system
may not turn off automatically.
51GB
Watching a DVD by a single
button press
(One-Touch Play)
Press ONE-TOUCH PLAY
Your TV turns on, your TV’s function is set to
the HDMI input to which the system is
connected, and the system starts playing a disc
automatically.
The System Audio Control function is also
activated automatically.
Using the Theatre Mode
(Theatre Mode)
If your TV is compatible with the Theatre Mode,
you can enjoy optimal image and sound quality
suited for movies, and the System Audio Control
function is activated automatically.
Press THEATRE.
Note
screen and the front panel display of the system may
differ.
Tip
• You can also operate the System Audio Control
function via the TV menu.
• You can operate the volume and mute control of the
system via the TV remote.
Receiving the digital audio
signal of your TV
(Audio Return Channel)
The system can receive the digital audio signal
of your TV via an HDMI cable when your TV is
compatible with the Audio Return Channel
function. You can enjoy TV sound via the
system by using just one HDMI cable. For
details, see [AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL]
(page 62).
Operating the system via the
TV remote
• Depending on your TV, this function may not work.
Enjoying TV sound from the
speakers by this system
(System Audio Control)
To use this function, connect the system and
your TV with an audio cord and an HDMI cable
(page 26).
Press [/1 to turn on the system while your
TV is turned on.
The System Audio Control function is activated.
TV sound is output from the system speakers,
and the volume of your TV’s speakers is
minimized automatically.
Note
• While your TV is in PAP (picture and picture) mode,
the System Audio Control function will not work.
When your TV exits PAP mode, the output method of
your TV returns to the one before PAP mode.
• Depending on the TV, when you adjust the system’s
volume, the volume level appears on the TV screen.
In this case, the volume levels that appear on the TV
52GB
(Remote Easy Control)
You can control the basic functions of the
system via the TV remote when the system’s
video output is displayed on the TV screen. For
details, refer to the operating instructions of the
TV.
Changing the language for the
system’s on-screen display in
sync with your TV
(Language Follow)
When you change the language for the on-screen
display of your TV, the system’s on-screen
display language is also changed.
Note
• When the system’s on-screen display is displayed,
this function does not work.
Transferring Songs onto
a USB Device
You can transfer songs on an audio CD or radio
programs onto a USB device by encoding to
MP3 format. You can also transfer MP3 files on
a DATA CD/DATA DVD onto a USB device.
For connecting the USB device, see “Playing
Files on a Disc/USB Device” (page 34).
the name without overwriting the original
folder or file.
To select the transfer destination
of the USB device
You can select the memory number for transfer
depending on the USB device.
Press MEMORY SELECT.
Selected memory number
The transferred music is limited to private use
only. Use of the music beyond this limit requires
permission of the copyright holders.
USB Memory 2 selected.
Home Theatre System
• Do not connect the unit and the USB device
through a USB hub.
• Make sure there is enough space in the USB
device for transferring.
• Do not remove the USB device during
transferring.
• When you are transferring tracks from an
audio CD, the tracks are recorded as 128 kbps
MP3 files.
• When you are transferring MP3 files from a
DATA CD/DATA DVD, the MP3 files are
transferred with the same bit rate as the
original MP3 files.
• When you are transferring a radio program, the
audio is recorded as a 128 kbps MP3 file.
• CD text information is not transferred in the
created MP3 files.
• If you stop a transfer from an audio CD
halfway, the MP3 file that was being created is
deleted.
• Transferring stops automatically if:
– the USB device runs out of space during
transfer.
– the number of folders on the USB device
reaches the limit for the number that the
system can recognize.
• You can store up to 150 files in a folder.
• You can store up to 199 folders in a single
USB device.
• If a folder or file that you are trying to transfer
already exists on the USB device with the
same name, a sequential number is added after
Note
• When the memory cannot be selected, [Operation not
possible.] appears on the TV screen.
• The memory number changes depending on the USB
device.
• Select a transfer destination before transfer.
Folder and file generation rules
Convenient Functions
Notes on USB transferring
When transferring onto a USB device, a
“MUSIC” folder is created directly below the
“ROOT”. Folders and files are generated within
this “MUSIC” folder as follows according to the
transferring method and source.
• When transferring multiple tracks on an audio
CD or multiple MP3 files on a DATA CD/
DATA DVD
Source
Folder name
MP3
Audio CD
Same as the transferring source1)
“FLDR001”2)
“TRACK001”3)
File name
• When transferring a single track on an audio
CD or a single MP3 file on a DATA CD/
DATA DVD
Source
Folder name
File name
MP3
“REC1-MP3”4)
Same as the
transferring
source1)
Audio CD
“REC1-CD”4)
“TRACK001”3)
53GB
• When transferring a radio program
Folder name
File name
“FM001”4)
“TRACK001”3)
To select individual tracks/MP3
files/folders
to 64 characters of the name are assigned
(including the extension).
Press X/x to highlight the track/MP3 file/folder,
then press
to add a check in Step 5.
To cancel the selection, highlight the track/MP3
file/folder, then press
to remove the check.
2)
Folders are assigned in numeric order thereafter.
x For an audio CD
3)
Files are assigned in numeric order thereafter.
1)Up
Remaining space of the USB device
4)A
new file is transferred in the “REC1-MP3” or
“REC1-CD” folder each time single-track
transferring is performed.
Transferring tracks on an
audio CD or MP3 files on a
DATA CD/DATA DVD onto a USB
device
1
2
3
Load an audio CD/DATA CD/DATA
DVD.
USB TRANSFER
2
3
START
ALL
ALL
x For a DATA CD/DATA DVD
Remaining space of the USB device
USB TRANSFER
2002_Remixes
01_Back_Seat_O...
02_One_Nights_...
03_Are_You_Ma...
04_I_Can_Lose_...
05_Soul_Survivo...
06_Strangers_B...
07_Stay_maxi_ve...
[USB
.
x For an audio CD
Press
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Tracks to be transferred
Press
DISPLAY while the system is
in stop mode.
Press X/x to select
TRANSFER], then press
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
1
and skip to Step 5.
START
ALL
ALL
x For a DATA CD/DATA DVD
Follow the next Step.
4
Press X/x to select [TRACK] or
[FOLDER], then press
.
• [TRACK]: The folder list appears. Press
X/x to select the desired folder, then press
.
• [FOLDER]: The folders recorded on the
DATA CD/DATA DVD appear. You can
transfer all MP3 files in the folder.
5
Press C/X/x/c to select [x ALL] (for an
audio CD) or [ ALL] (for a DATA CD/
DATA DVD), then press
.
MP3 files/folders to be transferred
Transferring by single button
press
You can transfer tracks/MP3 files simply onto a
USB device by using REC TO USB.
1
2
Press C/X/x/c to select [START], then
press
.
To cancel transferring, press x.
54GB
Press x.
To transfer all tracks, skip to Step 4.
To transfer a single track, follow the next
Step.
To deselect all tracks, select [s ALL], then
press
.
6
Load an audio CD/DATA CD/DATA
DVD.
3
Select the desired track/MP3 file, then
press N.
4
Press REC TO USB on the unit.
REC TO USB lights up and “READING”
appears in the front panel display. Then,
“PUSH PLAY” and the remaining space of
the USB device appear alternately in the
front panel display.
5
Press N to start transferring.
When transferring is completed,
“COMPLETE” appears in the front panel
display and playback of the disc and USB
device stops automatically.
To cancel transferring, press x.
Transferring a radio program
1
2
3
You can erase audio files (“.mp3,” “.wma,” or
“.m4a”) on the USB device.
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“USB.”
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
2
3
Press X/x to select a folder.
Select the audio file(s).
x To erase all audio files in a folder
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“FM.”
Press CLEAR.
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
Press
and press X/x to select the desired
audio file, then press CLEAR.
Select the radio station by pressing
PRESET +/– or TUNING +/–.
x To erase an audio file
4
Press REC TO USB on the unit.
REC TO USB lights up and “PLEASE
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
Then, “PUSH PLAY” and the remaining
space of the USB device appear alternately
in the front panel display.
4
5
Erasing audio files on a USB
device
Press N to start transferring.
Press C/c to select [YES], then press
.
To cancel, select [NO], then press
Convenient Functions
You can transfer a radio program you are
listening to onto a USB device.
Tip
• A new MP3 file is created automatically after
approximately 1 hour of transferring.
.
Note
• Do not remove the USB device while erasing.
• If the folder to be erased contains non-audio format
files or sub folders, these are erased from the list on
the TV screen, but are not erased from the USB
device.
Press x to stop transferring.
To create a new MP3 file while
transferring
Press REC TO USB while transferring.
“NEW TRK” appears in the display and
transferring continues in a new MP3 file right
after you press REC TO USB.
If you press REC TO USB again within a few
seconds, a new MP3 file cannot be created.
Note
• When a new MP3 file is created, transferring is
temporarily disabled.
55GB
Using the Sleep Timer
You can set the system to turn off at a preset
time, so you can fall asleep listening to music.
Press SLEEP.
Each time you press SLEEP, the minutes display
(the remaining time) changes by 10 minutes.
Adjusting the Delay
Between the Picture and
Sound
[A/V SYNC]
To check the remaining time
Press SLEEP once.
To change the remaining time
Press SLEEP repeatedly to select the desired
time.
When the sound does not match the pictures on
the TV screen, you can adjust the delay between
the picture and sound.
To cancel the sleep timer
1
2
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “OFF” appears in
the front panel display.
3
To set the sleep timer using the
system menu
1
2
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
3
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
The minutes display (the remaining time)
changes by 10 minutes.
4
56GB
Press SYSTEM MENU.
DISPLAY.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[A/V SYNC],
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
• [OFF]: Off.
• [ON]: You can adjust the delay between
the picture and sound.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Press X/x to select “SLEEP,” then
press
or c.
Press
Note
• Depending on the input stream, [A/V SYNC] may not
be effective.
Enjoying Multiplex
Broadcast Sound
(DUAL MONO)
You can enjoy multiplex broadcast sound when
the system receives or plays a Dolby Digital
multiplex broadcast signal.
Note
Press AUDIO repeatedly to select the audio
signal.
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
• “MAIN”: Sound of the main language will be
output.
• “SUB”: Sound of the sub language will be
output.
• “MAIN+SUB”: Mixed sound of both the main
and sub languages will be output.
The sound distortion of the connected
component may be improved by reducing the
input level.
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“TV” or “AUDIO IN.”
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
2
3
4
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Press X/x to select “ATT,” then press
or c.
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
• “ON”: The input level is attenuated.
• “OFF”: Normal input level.
This setting is made separately for each
function.
5
Convenient Functions
• To receive a Dolby Digital signal, you need to
connect a TV or other component to the unit with a
digital optical cord* (page 26). If your TV is
compatible with the Audio Return Channel function
(page 52), you can receive a Dolby Digital signal via
an HDMI cable.
* DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K only.
Changing the Input Level
of the Sound from
Connected Components
Press SYSTEM MENU.
57GB
Settings
Changing the Brightness
of the Front Panel
Display
1
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Press X/x to select “DIMMER,” then
press
or c.
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
3
Reperforming the Quick
Setup
1
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
2
3
4
Press X/x to select the brightness of
the front panel display, then press
.
Press
DISPLAY while the system is
in stop mode.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[SETUP],
Press X/x to select [QUICK], then press
.
Perform the Quick Setup following the
procedure of “Performing the Quick Setup”
(page 31).
• “OFF”: The front panel display is bright.
• “ON”: The front panel display is dim.
4
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“DVD/CD.”
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Tip
• The power indicator also becomes dim when you
select “ON.” In addition, for DAV-DZ940K, the
VOLUME control indicator turns off.
Setting the
Demonstration Mode to
On/Off
You can turn on/off the demonstration in the
front panel display while the system is in
standby mode.
1
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
58GB
1
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Press X/x to select “AUTO.STBY,” then
press
or c.
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
3
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
• “ON”: On.
• “OFF”: Off.
4
The system enters standby mode automatically
when you do not operate the system for about 30
minutes and the system is not outputting sound
for about 30 minutes. “AUTO.STBY” begins to
flash in the front panel display about 2 minutes
before the system enters standby mode.
You can turn the auto standby function on/off.
Press X/x to select “DEMO,” then
press
or c.
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
3
Setting the System to
Standby Mode
Automatically
Press X/x to select the setting, then
press
.
• “ON”: On.
• “OFF”: Off.
4
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Performing Further
Settings
6
Press X/x to select an item, then press
.
The options for the selected item appear.
Example: [TV TYPE]
VIDEO SETUP
16:9
TV TYPE:
16:9
PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):
OFF
4:3 LETTERFULL
BOX
4:3 OUTPUT:
AUTO
COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD)4:3
: PAN SCAN
PAUSE MODE:
AUTO
You can make various adjustments to items such
as picture and sound.
Displayed items vary depending on the area and
model.
Options
Note
• Playback settings stored in the disc take priority over
the Setup Display settings and not all the functions
described may work.
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select
“DVD/CD.”
The selected item appears in the front panel
display.
3
4
5
Press
DISPLAY while the system is
in stop mode.
Press X/x to select
then press
.
[SETUP],
Press X/x to select a setting, then
press
.
The setting is selected and setup is
complete.
Example: [4:3 LETTER BOX]
VIDEO SETUP
4:3 LETTER BOX
TV TYPE:
PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):
OFF
4:3 OUTPUT:
FULL
AUTO
COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):
PAUSE MODE:
AUTO
Press X/x to select [CUSTOM], then
press
.
Press X/x to select the setup item, then
press
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[LANGUAGE SETUP] (page 59)
[VIDEO SETUP] (page 60)
[HDMI SETUP] (page 61)
[AUDIO SETUP] (page 62)
[SYSTEM SETUP] (page 63)
[SPEAKER SETUP] (page 64)
Example: [VIDEO SETUP]
Selected setting
To reset all of the [SETUP]
settings
To reset all of the [SETUP] settings, see
[RESET] (page 64).
Setting the display or sound
track language
[LANGUAGE SETUP]
Selected item
VIDEO SETUP
TV TYPE:
PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):
4:3 OUTPUT:
COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):
PAUSE MODE:
Settings
2
7
16:9
OFF
FULL
AUTO
AUTO
Set various languages for the on-screen display
or sound track.
x [OSD] (On-Screen Display)
You can switch the display language on the TV
screen.
Setup items
x [MENU]
You can switch the language for the disc’s
menu.
59GB
x [AUDIO]
You can switch the language of the sound track.
When you select [ORIGINAL], the language
given priority on the disc is selected.
[4:3 PAN SCAN]: Select this when you connect
a 4:3 standard TV. The system automatically
displays a wide picture on the entire screen and
cuts off the portions that do not fit.
x [SUBTITLE]
You can switch the language of the subtitles
recorded on the DVD VIDEO.
When you select [AUDIO FOLLOW], the
language for the subtitles changes according to
the language you selected for the sound track.
Note
• When you select a language in [MENU], [AUDIO],
or [SUBTITLE] that is not recorded on the DVD
VIDEO, one of the recorded languages will be
automatically selected (depending on the disc, the
language may not be selected automatically).
Tip
• If you select [OTHERS t] in [MENU], [AUDIO],
and [SUBTITLE], select and enter a language code
from “Language Code List” (page 78) using the
number buttons.
x [PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT)]
(DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K
only)
You can set the progressive signal that is output
from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to
on/off. For details, see “To select the type of
video signal output from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks” (page 33).
[OFF]: The system outputs interlace signals.
[ON]: The system outputs progressive signals.
When you select [ON], follow the Steps below.
1
2
Settings for the display
3
x [TV TYPE]
Press C/c to select [START], then
press
.
Press C/c to select [YES], then press
.
The system outputs a progressive signal. If
you select [NO], the system will not output
a progressive signal.
You can select the aspect ratio of the connected
TV.
[16:9]: Select this when you connect a widescreen TV or a TV with a wide-screen mode.
.
The system outputs a progressive signal for
about 5 seconds. Check that the screen is
displayed correctly.
[VIDEO SETUP]
Select settings according to your TV.
Select [ON], then press
Note
• [PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT)] is
effective only when you connect the unit and TV with
a component video cable (page 26).
x [4:3 OUTPUT]
[4:3 LETTER BOX]: Select this when you
connect a 4:3 standard TV. The system displays
a wide picture with bands on the upper and
lower portions of the TV screen.
60GB
(DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K
only)
When you use a 16:9 aspect ratio TV, you can
adjust the aspect ratio to watch 4:3 aspect ratio
signals. If you can change the aspect ratio on
your TV, change the setting on your TV, not the
system.
[FULL]: Select this when you can change the
aspect ratio on your TV.
[NORMAL]: Select this when you cannot
change the aspect ratio on your TV. A 16:9
aspect ratio signal with black bands on left and
right sides of the image appears.
x [BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT OUT)]
(For Latin American and Taiwan models of
DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K
only)
You can select the black level (setup level) for
the video signals output from the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks.
You cannot select this and the setting is not
effective when the system outputs a progressive
signal.
16:9 aspect ratio TV
Note
• [4:3 OUTPUT] is effective only when you set [TV
TYPE] in [VIDEO SETUP] to [16:9].
x [COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD)]
You can select the color system when you play a
VIDEO CD.
[AUTO]: The system outputs the disc’s video
signal, either PAL or NTSC. If your TV uses a
DUAL system, select [AUTO].
[PAL]: The system changes the video signal of
an NTSC disc and outputs it in the PAL system.
[NTSC]: The system changes the video signal of
a PAL disc and outputs it in the NTSC system.
x [PAUSE MODE]
(DVD VIDEO/DVD-R/DVD-RW only)
You can select the picture in pause mode.
[AUTO]: The picture, including subjects that
move dynamically, is output with no jitter. This
setting is for normal usage.
[FRAME]: The picture, including subjects that
do not move dynamically, is output in high
resolution.
Settings
(African, Asian, Indian, and Middle Eastern
models only)
[OFF]: You can set the black level of the output
signal to the standard level.
[ON]: You can raise the standard black level.
Use this when the picture becomes too black.
Settings for HDMI
Note
• You cannot change the color system of the disc itself.
• You can change the color system of this system
according to the connected TV (page 26).
[HDMI SETUP]
x [HDMI RESOLUTION]
x [BLACK LEVEL]
(Latin American and Taiwan models only)
You can select the black level (setup level) for
the video signals output from the jacks other
than COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (DAVDZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K only)/
HDMI OUT.
[ON]: The standard level.
[OFF]: You can lower the standard black level.
Use this when the picture becomes too white.
You can select the type of video signal that is
output from the HDMI OUT jack.
[AUTO (1920 × 1080p)]: The system outputs
the optimal video signal for the connected TV.
[1920 × 1080i]: The system outputs 1920 ×
1080i* video signals.
[1280 × 720p]: The system outputs 1280 ×
720p* video signals.
[720 × 480p]**: The system outputs 720 ×
480p* video signals.
* i: interlace, p: progressive
** Depending on the area, [720 × 480/576p] may
appear.
61GB
x [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
x [JPEG RESOLUTION]
This function is available when you connect the
system and TV that is compatible with the
Control for HDMI function with an HDMI
cable.
You can select the resolution of JPEG image
files output from the HDMI OUT jack.
[ON]: On. You can operate mutually between
components that are connected with an HDMI
cable.
[OFF]: Off.
x [AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL]
This function is available when you connect the
system and TV that is compatible with the Audio
Return Channel function.
[AUTO]: The system can receive the digital
audio signal of your TV via an HDMI cable
automatically.
[Off]: Off.
Note
• This function is available only when [CONTROL
FOR HDMI] is set to [ON].
x [YCBCR/RGB (HDMI)]
You can select the type of HDMI signal output
from the HDMI OUT jack.
[YCBCR]: The system outputs YCBCR signals.
[RGB]: The system outputs RGB signals.
]: The system outputs standard
[SD
resolution with a black frame.
[HD
]: The system outputs HD resolution
with a black frame.
[HD]: The system outputs the HD resolution
without a black frame.
]: The system outputs
[(1920 × 1080i) HD
full size HD resolution with a black frame.
[(1920 × 1080i) HD]: The system outputs full
size HD resolution without a black frame.
Note
• [JPEG RESOLUTION] is effective only when you
set [TV TYPE] in [VIDEO SETUP] to [16:9], and
you set [HDMI RESOLUTION] in [HDMI SETUP]
to other than [720 × 480p] or [720 × 480/576p].
• You can select [(1920 × 1080i) HD
] or [(1920 ×
1080i) HD] only when you set [HDMI
RESOLUTION] in [HDMI SETUP] to [1920 ×
1080i].
• The HDMI signal will stop momentarily when:
– the system is loading or unloading a DATA CD or
DATA DVD.
– you connect or remove a USB device.
Settings for the audio
[AUDIO SETUP]
x [AUDIO (HDMI)]
You can select the audio output status from the
HDMI OUT jack.
[OFF]: The system does not output sound from
the HDMI OUT jack.
[ON]: The system outputs audio signals by
converting Dolby Digital, DTS, or 96 kHz/24bit PCM signals to 48 kHz/16-bit PCM.
Note
• When you set the function to other than “DVD/CD”
or “USB,” the system does not output the sound from
the HDMI OUT jack even if you set [AUDIO
(HDMI)] to [ON].
62GB
x [AUDIO DRC]
You can compress the dynamic range of the
sound track. [AUDIO DRC] is useful for
watching movies at low volume late at night.
[OFF]: No compression of dynamic range.
[STANDARD]: The system reproduces the
sound track with the kind of dynamic range that
the recording engineer intended.
[MAX]: The system compresses dynamic range
fully.
Note
• [AUDIO DRC] works only for Dolby Digital.
x [TRACK SELECTION]
You can give the sound track which contains the
highest number of channels priority when
multiple audio formats (PCM, DTS, Dolby
Digital, or MPEG audio) are recorded.
[OFF]: Off.
[AUTO]: The system selects the sound track
automatically according to the priority.
ratings. Scenes may be blocked or replaced with
different scenes.
1
2
3
Note
• When you set the item to [AUTO], the language may
change. The [TRACK SELECTION] setting has
higher priority than the [AUDIO] settings in
[LANGUAGE SETUP] (page 59). (Depending on
the disc, this function may not work.)
Other Settings
Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password
using the number buttons, then press
.
Press X/x to select [STANDARD], then
press
.
Press X/x to select a geographic area
as the playback limitation level, then
press
.
When you select [OTHERS t], select and
enter a standard code from “Parental
Control Area Code List” (page 78) using
the number buttons.
4
Press X/x to select the desired level,
then press
.
The lower the value, the stricter the
limitation.
x [SCREEN SAVER]
You can reduce the damage to the display device
(ghosting). Press any button (e.g., N) to cancel
the screen saver.
[ON]: The screen saver image appears if you do
not operate the system for about 15 minutes.
[OFF]: Off.
Settings
5
[SYSTEM SETUP]
Press X/x to select [LEVEL], then press
.
To turn off the [PARENTAL CONTROL]
function
Set [LEVEL] to [OFF] in Step 5.
To play a disc for which [PARENTAL
CONTROL] is set
When you load the disc and press N, the
display for entering your password appears.
Enter your 4-digit password using the number
buttons, then press
.
x [BACKGROUND]
You can select the background color or picture
on the TV screen.
[JACKET PICTURE]: The jacket picture (still
picture) appears, but only when the jacket
picture is already recorded on the disc (CDEXTRA, etc.). If the disc does not contain a
jacket picture, a preset picture stored in the
system appears.
[GRAPHICS]: A preset picture stored in the
system appears.
[BLUE]: The background is blue.
[BLACK]: The background is black.
Tip
• If you forget your password, enter “199703” using
the number buttons, then press . The display will
ask you to enter a new 4-digit password. After you
enter a new 4-digit password, replace the disc in the
unit and press N. When the display for entering your
password appears, enter your new password.
Changing the password
1
2
3
x [PARENTAL CONTROL]
The [PARENTAL CONTROL] function allows
you to restrict playback of DVDs that have
Enter your 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press
.
Press X/x to select [CHANGE
PASSWORD t], then press
.
Enter a new 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press
.
If you make a mistake entering your
password, press C before you press
then input the correct number.
,
63GB
4
To confirm your password, re-enter it
using the number buttons, then press
.
x [CONNECTION]
[FRONT]
[YES]
x [MULTI-DISC RESUME]
This system recalls the point where you stopped
the disc the last time it was played and resumes
playback from that point the next time you insert
the same disc.
[ON]: The system stores the resume points in
memory for up to 10 discs.
[OFF]: The system does not store the resume
points in memory. Playback restarts at the
resume point only for the current disc in the unit.
[CENTER]
[YES]: Normally select this.
[NONE]: Select this if no center speaker is used.
[SURROUND]
[YES]: Normally select this.
[NONE]: Select this if no surround speakers are
used.
[SUBWOOFER]
[YES]
Note
x [DISTANCE]
• When the resume playback memory is full, the
resume playback point for the earliest disc is deleted.
Set the distance of all the speakers from the
listening position.
For the best possible surround sound, place all
speakers at the same distance from the listening
position. The distance can be between 1.0 to 7.0
meters for the front speakers, and 0.0 to 7.0
meters for the center speaker and surround
speakers.
If you cannot place the center speaker at the
same distance, you can move the center speaker
up to 1.6 meters closer to the listening position.
If you cannot place surround speakers at the
same distance, you can move the surround
speakers up to 5.0 meters closer to the listening
position.
x [RESET]
You can return the [SETUP] settings other than
[PARENTAL CONTROL] to the default
settings.
Press C/c to select [YES], then press
.
You can also quit the process and return to the
Control Menu by selecting [NO] here.
Do not press [/1 while resetting the system as
it takes a few seconds to complete.
Note
• The [MEDIA], [INTERVAL], and [EFFECT]
settings also return to the default settings.
Settings for the speakers
[SPEAKER SETUP]
You can adjust the speaker settings manually
without performing the Quick Setup.
Select the speakers you will use, set the speaker
distance from your listening position, and then
adjust the sound level for each speaker. You can
adjust the sound level by using the [TEST
TONE] function.
[FRONT] 3.0 m: Set the front speaker distance.
[CENTER] 3.0 m: Set the center speaker
distance (up to 1.6 meters closer to the front
speakers).
[SURROUND] 3.0 m: Set the surround speaker
distance (up to 5.0 meters closer to the front
speakers).
x [LEVEL (FRONT)]
You can adjust the sound level of the front
speakers, center speaker, and subwoofer. You
can set the parameters from –6.0 dB to 0 dB for
[L/R], and from –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB for
[CENTER] and [SUBWOOFER]. Be sure to set
[TEST TONE] to [ON] for easy adjustment.
[L/R] 0.0 dB: Set the front speaker level.
[CENTER] 0.0 dB: Set the center speaker level.
64GB
[SUBWOOFER] +2.0 dB: Set the subwoofer
level.
x [LEVEL (SURROUND)]
You can adjust the sound level of the surround
speakers. You can set the parameter from –6.0
dB to +6.0 dB. Set [TEST TONE] to [ON] for
easy adjustment.
[L/R] 0.0 dB: Set the surround speaker level.
x [TEST TONE]
You can adjust the sound level of the speakers
by using the [TEST TONE] function.
1
2
3
4
Set the [TEST TONE] to [ON].
Settings
[OFF]: The test tone is not emitted from the
speakers.
[ON]: The test tone is emitted from each speaker
in sequence while adjusting the level.
Adjust the sound level as follows.
Press C/X/x/c repeatedly to select the
desired speaker and the level, then
press
.
Repeat Step 2.
Press C/X/x/c to set [TEST TONE] to
[OFF] after adjusting the speaker level.
65GB
On adjusting volume
Additional Information
Precautions
On power sources
• Unplug the unit from the wall outlet (mains) if you do
not intend to use it for an extended period of time. To
disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug, never by
the cord.
On placement
• Place the system in a location with adequate
ventilation to prevent heat build-up in the system.
• At high volume, over long periods of time, the cabinet
becomes hot to the touch. This is not a malfunction.
However, touching the cabinet should be avoided. Do
not place the system in a confined space where
ventilation is poor as this may cause overheating.
• Do not block the ventilation slots by putting anything
on the system. The system is equipped with a high
power amplifier. If the ventilation slots are blocked,
the system can overheat and malfunction.
• Do not place the system on surfaces (rugs, blankets,
etc.) or near materials (curtains, draperies) that may
block the ventilation slots.
• Do not install the system near heat sources such as
radiators, or air ducts, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust, mechanical vibration, or
shock.
• Do not install the system in an inclined position. It is
designed to be operated in a horizontal position only.
• Keep the system and discs away from components
with strong magnets, such as microwave ovens, or
large loudspeakers.
• Do not place heavy objects on the system.
On operation
• If the system is brought directly from a cold to a warm
location, or is placed in a very damp room, moisture
may condense on the lenses inside the unit. Should
this occur, the system may not operate properly. In
this case, remove the disc and leave the system turned
on for about half an hour until the moisture
evaporates.
• If anything falls into the cabinet, unplug the unit and
have it checked by qualified personnel before
operating it any further.
66GB
• Do not turn up the volume while listening to a section
with very low level inputs or no audio signals. If you
do, the speakers may be damaged when a peak level
section is suddenly played.
On cleaning
• Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft cloth
slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do
not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder or
solvent such as alcohol or benzine.
If you have any questions or problems concerning
your system, please consult your nearest Sony dealer.
On cleaning discs, disc/lens
cleaners
• Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens cleaners
(including wet or spray types). These may cause
the apparatus to malfunction.
On your TV’s color
• If the speakers should cause your TV screen to have
color irregularity, turn off the TV then turn it on after
15 to 30 minutes. If color irregularity should persist,
place the speakers further away from your TV set.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Caution: This system is capable of holding a still
video image or on-screen display image on your
television screen indefinitely. If you leave the still
video image or on-screen display image displayed
on your TV for an extended period of time you risk
permanent damage to your television screen.
Projection televisions are especially susceptible to
this.
On moving the system
• Before moving the system, make sure that there is no
disc inserted, and remove the AC power cord (mains
lead) from the wall outlet (mains).
Notes about the Discs
On handling discs
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its
edge. Do not touch the surface.
• Do not stick paper or tape on the disc.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in
a car parked in direct sunlight as the
temperature may rise considerably inside the
car.
• After playing, store the disc in its case.
On cleaning
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,
commercially available cleaners, or anti-static
spray intended for vinyl LPs.
Additional Information
• Before playing, clean the disc with a cleaning
cloth.
Wipe the disc from the center out.
This system can only play a standard circular
disc. Using neither standard nor circular discs
(e.g., card, heart, or star shape) may cause a
malfunction.
Do not use a disc that has a commercially
available accessory attached, such as a label or
ring.
67GB
Troubleshooting
If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the system, use this troubleshooting
guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, consult your
nearest Sony dealer.
Note that if service personnel changes some parts during repair, these parts may be retained.
General
Symptom
Problems and solutions
The power is not turned on.
• Check that the AC power cord (mains lead) is connected securely.
The remote does not function.
• The distance between the remote and the unit is too far.
• The batteries in the remote are weak.
The system does not work
normally.
• Disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains), then
reconnect after several minutes.
• Perform the following procedure (noting that the system parameters, such as
preset stations, return to the default settings):
1 Press "/1 to turn on the system.
2 Press N, FUNCTION, and "/1 on the unit at the same time. “RESET”
appears in the front panel display.
Picture
Symptom
Problems and solutions
There is no picture.
• The video input on your TV is not set so that you can view pictures from the
system.
• Check the output method on your system.
There is no picture when you
make an HDMI cable
connection.
• The unit is connected to an input device that is not HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection) compliant.
• If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video output, change the type of video signal
output from the HDMI OUT jack (page 61).
Connect your TV and the unit using a video jack other than HDMI OUT, and
switch your TV’s input to the connected video input so that you can see the onscreen displays. Change the type of video signal output from the HDMI OUT
jack, and switch your TV’s input back to HDMI. If the picture still does not
appear, repeat the Steps and try other options.
There is no picture when you
make a component video cable
connection (DAV-DZ640K/
DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K
only).
• You have set progressive format but your TV cannot accept the signal in
progressive format. In this case, return the setting to interlace format (the
default setting) (pages 32, 60).
• You have set [PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT)] in [VIDEO SETUP] to
[ON] (page 60) even though your TV cannot accept the progressive signal. In
this case, disconnect the HDMI cable from the unit and then set to [OFF].
• Even if your TV is compatible with progressive format (525p/625p) signals, the
image may be affected when you set progressive format. In this case, return the
setting to interlace format (the default setting) (pages 32, 60).
Picture noise appears.
• If the picture output from your system goes through your VCR to get to your
TV, the copy-protection signal applied to some DVD programs could affect
picture quality. Connect the unit directly to your TV.
An image is not displayed on the • Check the setting of [TV TYPE] in [VIDEO SETUP] (page 60).
entire TV screen.
• The aspect ratio on the disc is fixed.
68GB
Symptom
Problems and solutions
Color irregularity occurs on the
TV screen.
The system’s speakers contain magnet parts, so magnetic distortion may occur.
When color irregularity occurs on the TV screen, check the following items:
• Install the speakers at least 0.3 meters from your TV set.
• If the color irregularity persists, turn off your TV set once, then turn it on after
15 to 30 minutes.
• Make sure that no magnetic object (magnetic latch on a TV stand, health care
device, toy, etc.) is placed near the speakers.
• Reposition the speakers farther away from your TV set.
Playback picture becomes
distorted.
• Set [YCBCR] in [YCBCR/RGB (HDMI)] to [RGB] (page 62).
Sound
Symptom
Problems and solutions
There is no sound.
• The speaker cord is not connected securely.
• Check the speaker settings (page 64).
There is no sound when the
component (digital satellite
receiver, PlayStation 3, etc.) is
connected directly to your TV
via HDMI.
• Perform the following:
– Connect an audio cable from the AUDIO OUT (audio out) jack of your TV
to the system (page 26) and select the “TV” function.
– Disable your TV’s speakers.
There is no digital sound from
the HDMI OUT jack when using
the Audio Return Channel
function.
• Set [AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL] in [HDMI SETUP] to [AUTO] (page 62).
• Set [CONTROL FOR HDMI] in [HDMI SETUP] to [ON] (page 62).
• Make sure that your TV is compatible with the Audio Return Channel function.
• Make sure that an HDMI cable is connected to a jack on your TV that is
compatible with the Audio Return Channel function.
• The sampling frequency of the input stream is more than 48 kHz.
Additional Information
• The sampling frequency of the input stream is more than 48 kHz.
There is no sound from the
DIGITAL IN OPTICAL jack
(DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K
only).
The system does not output
• Set [AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL] in [HDMI SETUP] to [OFF] (page 62).
sound correctly when connected
to a set-top box.
Severe hum or noise is heard.
• Move your TV away from the audio components.
• Clean the disc.
The sound loses stereo effect
when you play a VIDEO CD, a
CD, or an audio file.
• Select stereo sound by pressing AUDIO (page 38).
There is no sound or the volume • Check the sound mode (page 50).
level is very low from a certain • Check the speaker connections and settings (pages 25, 64).
speaker or all the speakers.
• Depending on the DVD, the output signal may not be the entire 5.1 channel.
The sound comes from the center • Depending on the disc, the sound may come from the center speaker only.
speaker only.
There is no system sound from
your TV.
• Set [AUDIO (HDMI)] in [HDMI SETUP] to [ON] (page 62).
• Perform the following procedure:
1Turn the system off and on again.
2Turn the connected component off and on again.
3Disconnect and then connect the HDMI cable again.
69GB
Symptom
Problems and solutions
The sound of files played from a • The bit rate used when encoding the audio files was low. Transfer audio files
DATA CD/DATA DVD/USB
encoded with higher bit rates onto the DATA CD/DATA DVD/USB device.
device is distorted.
There is noise or the sound skips • Copy the files to your computer, format the USB device in FAT12, FAT16, or
while playing a USB device.
FAT32 format, and transfer the files to the USB device again.
Disc playback
Symptom
Problems and solutions
A disc does not play.
• The region code on the DVD does not match the system.
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit and may cause damage to the lenses.
Remove the disc and leave the unit turned on for about half an hour.
The language for the sound track • Set the language via the disc’s menu.
or subtitle cannot be changed.
A disc does not start playing
from the beginning.
• While in stop mode, press x on the unit or the remote and then start playback
(page 37).
A DATA CD/DATA DVD
cannot be played.
• The DATA CD is not recorded in ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, or Joliet.
• The DATA DVD is not recorded in UDF (Universal Disk Format).
A file cannot be played.
• The extension of the file name or file format is not correct. See “Playable Discs/
Files on a USB Device” (page 5).
• Check the [MEDIA] setting (page 36).
• The system can play to a depth of 8 folders only.
• Check that the number of folders is 200 or less.
• Check that the number of audio files/JPEG image files in the folder is 150 or
less.
A JPEG image file cannot be
viewed.
• The JPEG image file is larger than 3,072 (width) × 2,048 (height) pixels in
normal format, or more than 2,000,000 pixels in progressive format which is
mainly used on Internet Web sites.
A video file cannot be played.
• The video file is larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height).
The titles of folders/files/file
names are not displayed
correctly.
• The system can only display numbers and letters of the alphabet. Other
characters are not displayed correctly.
USB playback
Symptom
Problems and solutions
A USB device does not start
playing from the beginning.
• While in stop mode, press x on the unit or the remote and then start playback
(page 37).
A USB device cannot be played. • USB devices formatted with file systems other than FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32
are unsupported.*
* This system supports FAT12, FAT16, and FAT32, but some USB devices
may not support all of these. For details, refer to the operating instructions of
the USB device or contact the manufacturer.
• If you use a partitioned USB device, only audio files on the first partition can
be played.
70GB
Symptom
Problems and solutions
A file cannot be played.
• The extension of the file name or file format is not correct. See “Playable Discs/
Files on a USB Device” (page 5).
• Check the [MEDIA] setting (page 36).
• The system can play to a depth of 8 folders only.
• Check that the number of folders is 200 or less.
• Check that the number of audio files/JPEG image files in the folder is 150 or
less.
• Files that are encrypted or protected by passwords, etc. cannot be played.
A JPEG image file cannot be
viewed.
• The JPEG image file is larger than 3,072 (width) × 2,048 (height) pixels in
normal format, or more than 2,000,000 pixels in progressive format which is
mainly used on Internet Web sites.
A video file cannot be played.
• The video file is larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height).
A WMA file cannot be played.
• A WMA file that is in WMA DRM, WMA Lossless, or WMA PRO format
cannot be played.
• An AAC file that is in AAC DRM or AAC Lossless format cannot be played.
The titles of folders/files/file
names are not displayed
correctly.
• The system can only display numbers and letters of the alphabet. Other
characters are not displayed correctly.
It takes time until playback
starts.
• After the system reads all files on the USB device, playback may take more
time than usual if:
– there are many folders or files on the USB device.
– the folder or file organization structure is very complex.
– the memory capacity is very large.
– the file size is extremely large.
– the internal memory is fragmented.
• The system is playing an audio file in AAC format.
A USB device which has been • It may be recorded in an unsupported format. If so, first take the precaution of
used on another device does not backing up important files on the USB device by copying them to your
work.
computer hard disk. Next, format the USB device in FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32
format, and transfer the files to the USB device again.
Additional Information
An AAC file cannot be played.
Audio track/file transfer
Symptom
Problems and solutions
You cannot start transferring
onto a USB device.
• The following problems may have occurred:
– The USB device is full.
– The number of audio files and folders on the USB device has reached the
upper limit.
– The USB device is write-protected.
Transferring stops before it is
finished.
• The communication speed of the USB device is extremely slow. Connect a
USB device that this system can play.
• If the transferring and erasing operations are repeated multiple times, the file
structure within the USB device becomes complex. Follow the procedure in the
operating instructions of the USB device to format the USB device. If the
problem persists, contact your nearest Sony dealer.
• The USB device is full.
• The number of audio files and folders on the USB device has reached the upper
limit.
71GB
Symptom
Problems and solutions
Transferring to a USB device
results in an error.
• The USB device was disconnected or the power was turned off during erasing.
Delete the partially-erased file. If this does not fix the problem, the USB device
may be broken. Follow the procedure in the operating instructions of the USB
device to format the USB device. If the problem persists, contact your nearest
Sony dealer.
• Check if the USB device is write-protected.
Audio files or folders on the
USB device cannot be erased.
Tuner
Symptom
Problems and solutions
Radio stations cannot be tuned
in.
• Check that the antenna (aerial) is connected securely. Adjust the antenna
(aerial) or connect an external antenna (aerial) if necessary.
• The signal strength of the stations is too weak (when tuning in with automatic
tuning). Use direct tuning.
FM reception is poor.
• Use a 75-ohm coaxial cable (not supplied) to connect the unit to an outdoor FM
antenna (aerial).
Control for HDMI
Symptom
Problems and solutions
The Control for HDMI function • Set [CONTROL FOR HDMI] in [HDMI SETUP] to [ON] (page 62).
does not work.
• Make sure that the connected component is compatible with the [CONTROL
FOR HDMI] function.
• Check the connected component’s setting for the Control for HDMI function.
Refer to the operating instructions of the component.
• If you change the HDMI connection, connect and disconnect the AC power
cord (mains lead), or have a power failure, set [CONTROL FOR HDMI] in
[HDMI SETUP] to [OFF], then set to [ON] (page 62).
• For details, see “Using the Control for HDMI Function for “BRAVIA” Sync”
(page 51).
No sound is output from the
• Make sure that the connected TV is compatible with the System Audio Control
system and TV while using the
function.
System Audio Control function. • For details, see “Using the Control for HDMI Function for “BRAVIA” Sync”
(page 51).
Karaoke
Symptom
Problems and solutions
Microphone sound is not output. • Set the karaoke mode to on (page 43).
• Connect the microphone to the unit properly.
• Connect a monaural dynamic microphone.
72GB
Messages
Symptom
Problems and solutions
“PROTECT” and “PUSH PWR” • Press "/1 to turn off the system, and check the following items after
appear alternately.
“STANDBY” disappears:
– Are the + and – speaker cords short-circuited?
– Is anything blocking the ventilation holes of the system?
– After checking the above items and fixing any problems, turn on the system.
If the cause of the problem cannot be found even after checking all the above
items, consult your nearest Sony dealer.
• A problem has been detected with the level of electrical current from the
(USB) port. Turn off the system and remove the USB device from the
(USB) port. Make sure there is no problem with the USB device. If this display
pattern persists, contact your nearest Sony dealer.
“LOCKED” appears and a disc
cannot be ejected.
• Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
“DATA ERR” appears.
• The file you want to play is broken.
• The file format does not match the extension of the file name. See “Playable
Discs/Files on a USB Device” (page 5).
• The JPEG image file format does not conform to DCF.
“READING” is displayed for a
long time while playing.
• The reading process can take a long time if:
– there are many folders or files on the USB device.
– the folder or file organization structure is very complex.
– the memory capacity is very large.
– the internal memory is fragmented.
Additional Information
“OVERLOAD,” “REMOVE,”
“USB,” then “PUSH PWR”
appear.
73GB
Self-diagnosis Function
(When letters/numbers appear in the
display)
When the self-diagnosis function is activated to
prevent the system from malfunctioning, a 5character service number (e.g., C 13 50) with a
combination of a letter and 4 digits appears on
the TV screen or front panel display. In this case,
check the following table:
C:13:50
74GB
First 3
characters of
the service
number
Cause and/or corrective action
C 13
The disc is dirty.
,Clean the disc with a soft cloth
(page 67).
E XX
(XX is a
number)
To prevent a malfunction, the
system has performed the selfdiagnosis function.
,Contact your nearest Sony
dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility and give the 5character service number.
Example: E 61 10
When the version number
appears on the TV screen
When you turn on the system, the version
number [VER.X.XX] (X is a number) may
appear on the TV screen. Although this is not a
malfunction and for Sony service use only,
normal system operation will not be possible.
Turn off the system, and then turn on the system
again to operate.
VER.X.XX
Specifications
Signal format system
Latin American models:
Other models:
Amplifier Section
USB Section
Brazilian models:
POWER OUTPUT:
Front L/Front R/Center/
Surround L/Surround R:
142 W (per channel at 3
ohms, 1 kHz, 10% THD*,
127 V)
Subwoofer: 140 W
(at 3 ohms, 80 Hz, 10%
THD*, 127 V)
* Total harmonic
distortion
500 mA
Tuner Section
System
PLL quartz-locked digital
synthesizer
Tuning range
Brazilian models
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz
(100 kHz step)
Other models
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz
(50 kHz step)
Antenna (aerial)
FM wire antenna (aerial)
Antenna (aerial) terminals 75 ohms, unbalanced
Video Section
Outputs
DAV-DZ340K:
VIDEO: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms
HDMI OUT: Type A (19
pin)
DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K:
VIDEO: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms
COMPONENT:
Y: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ohms
HDMI OUT: Type A (19
pin)
Speakers
Front
DAV-DZ340K (SS-TS112)
Dimensions (approx.)
Mass (approx.)
Additional Information
Other models:
POWER OUTPUT (rated):Front L/Front R/Center/
Surround L/Surround R:
108 W (per channel at 3
ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD)
POWER OUTPUT (reference):
Front L/Front R/Center/
Surround L/Surround R:
167 W (per channel at 3
ohms, 1 kHz)
Subwoofer: 165 W (at 3
ohms, 80 Hz)
Inputs (Analog)
TV (AUDIO IN)
Sensitivity: 450/250 mV
AUDIO IN
Sensitivity: 250/125 mV
MIC
Sensitivity: 1 mV
Inputs (Digital)
DAV-DZ340K/DAV-DZ640K:
TV (Audio Return Channel)
Input Stream: Dolby
Digital 5.1ch/DTS 5.1ch/
Linear PCM 2ch
(Sampling Frequency: less
than 48 kHz)
DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K:
TV (Audio Return Channel/OPTICAL IN)
Input Stream: Dolby
Digital 5.1ch/DTS 5.1ch/
Linear PCM 2ch
(Sampling Frequency: less
than 48 kHz)
(USB) port:
Maximum current:
NTSC
NTSC/PAL
108 mm × 225 mm × 95
mm (w/h/d)
0.6 kg
DAV-DZ640K (SS-TS113)
Dimensions (approx.)
Mass (approx.)
108 mm × 595 mm × 79
mm (w/h/d) (wall-mounted
part)
260 mm × 1,005 mm × 260
mm (w/h/d) (whole
speaker)
1.1 kg (wall-mounted part)
2.3 kg (whole speaker)
CD/DVD System
Laser Diode Properties
Emission Duration:
Continuous
Laser Output: Less than
44.6 μW
* This output is the value measurement at a distance
of 200 mm from the objective lens surface on the
Optical Pick-up Block with 7 mm aperture.
75GB
DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K (SS-TS114)
Dimensions (approx.)
Mass (approx.)
108 mm × 595 mm × 79
mm (w/h/d) (wall-mounted
part)
260 mm × 1,185 mm × 260
mm (w/h/d) (whole
speaker)
1.1 kg (wall-mounted part)
2.7 kg (whole speaker)
Center (SS-CT111)
Dimensions (approx.)
Mass (approx.)
Power consumption
On: 160 W
Standby: 0.3 W*
* Valid when the system is in the following status:
– “DEMO” is set to “OFF.”
– [CONTROL FOR HDMI] is set to [OFF].
Dimensions (approx.)
430 mm × 55 mm × 350
mm (w/h/d) incl.
projecting parts
Mass (approx.)
3.5 kg
Supported file format
261 mm × 82 mm × 79 mm
(w/h/d)
0.6 kg
Surround
MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3)
File Extension:
Bitrate:
Sampling frequencies:
mp3
32 kbps - 320 kbps
32/44.1/48 kHz
DAV-DZ340K/DAV-DZ640K (SS-TS111)
WMA (USB device only)
Dimensions (approx.)
File Extension:
Bitrate:
Sampling frequencies:
Mass (approx.)
108 mm × 164 mm × 88
mm (w/h/d)
0.5 kg
wma
48 kbps - 192 kbps
44.1 kHz
DAV-DZ840K (SS-TS113)
AAC (USB device only)
Dimensions (approx.)
File Extension:
Bitrate:
Sampling frequencies:
Mass (approx.)
108 mm × 595 mm × 79
mm (w/h/d) (wall-mounted
part)
260 mm × 1,005 mm × 260
mm (w/h/d) (whole
speaker)
1.1 kg (wall-mounted part)
2.3 kg (whole speaker)
DAV-DZ940K (SS-TS114)
Dimensions (approx.)
Mass (approx.)
108 mm × 595 mm × 79
mm (w/h/d) (wall-mounted
part)
260 mm × 1,185 mm × 260
mm (w/h/d) (whole
speaker)
1.1 kg (wall-mounted part)
2.7 kg (whole speaker)
Subwoofer (SS-WS111)
Dimensions (approx.)
Mass (approx.)
230 mm × 400 mm × 305
mm (w/h/d)
6.4 kg
m4a
48 kbps - 320 kbps
44.1 kHz
Xvid
File Extension:
Video codec:
Bitrate:
Resolution/Frame rate:
Audio codec:
avi
Xvid video
4.854 Mbps (MAX)
720 × 480 30 fps
720 × 576 25 fps
MP3
MPEG4
File format:
File Extension:
Video codec:
Bitrate:
Frame rate:
Resolution:
Audio codec:
DRM:
MP4 File Format
mp4/m4v
MPEG4 Simple Profile
(AVC is not compatible.)
4 Mbps
30 fps
720 × 576
AAC-LC (HE-AAC is not
compatible.)
Not compatible
General
Power requirements
Taiwan models:
Argentine models:
Latin American models:
Saudi Arabian models:
Other models:
76GB
120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
220 V - 240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
110 V - 240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
127 V - 240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
220 V - 240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
• Standby power consumption 0.3 W.
• Over 85% power efficiency of amplifier block is
achieved with the full digital amplifier, S-Master.
Playback Priority of File Types
The table below describes the playback priority of file types under the [MEDIA] setting.
File type on a disc or USB
device
[MEDIA] setting
[VIDEO]
[MUSIC/
PHOTO]
[PHOTO]
[MUSIC]
Disc
USB device
Disc
Disc/USB
device
Disc/USB
device
Video files only
Video files
Video files
Video files
Video files
Video files
JPEG image files only
JPEG image
files
JPEG image
files
JPEG image
files
JPEG image
files
JPEG image
files
Audio files only
MP3 files
Audio files
MP3 files
Audio files*
Audio files*
Video files and JPEG image Video files
files
Video files
JPEG image
files
JPEG image
files
Video files
Video files and audio files
Video files
MP3 files
Audio files*
Audio files*
Audio files
MP3 files and
JPEG image
files with slide
show
JPEG image
files
Audio files*
Video files, audio files, and Video files
JPEG image files
Video files
MP3 files and
JPEG image
files with slide
show
JPEG image
files
Audio files*
* When using a disc, you can play MP3 files only.
Additional Information
Video files
Audio files and JPEG image MP3 files and
files
JPEG image
files with slide
show
77GB
Language Code List
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
Parental Control Area Code List
78GB
Index
Numerics
J
S
4:3 OUTPUT 60
JPEG RESOLUTION 62
A
K
A/V SYNC 56
ANGLE 38
AUDIO 60
AUDIO (HDMI) 62
AUDIO DRC 62
AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL
62
AUDIO SETUP 62
AUTO.STBY 58
Karaoke 43
ECHO 43
Karaoke Pon 44
Key Control 43
Vocal Select 44
B
SCREEN SAVER 63
SETUP 59
Shuffle Play 41
SLEEP 56
SOUND MODE 50
SPEAKER SETUP 64
CONNECTION 64
DISTANCE 64
LEVEL 64, 65
SUBTITLE 38, 60
SYSTEM MENU 48, 56, 57,
58
SYSTEM SETUP 63
M
BACKGROUND 63
BLACK LEVEL 61
BLACK LEVEL
(COMPONENT OUT) 61
MEDIA 36, 42
MENU 59
Multi Session CD 7
MULTI-DISC RESUME 64
Multiplex broadcast sound 57
C
L
Language Code List 78
LANGUAGE SETUP 59
COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO
CD) 61
CONTROL FOR HDMI 62
Control for HDMI 51
Control Menu 16
CUSTOM 59
N
D
P
DEMO 58
DIMMER 58
DUAL MONO 57
DVD’s menu 39
DYNAMIC BASS 50
PARENTAL CONTROL 63
PAUSE MODE 61
Playable discs 5
Program Play 40
PROGRESSIVE
(COMPONENT OUT) 60
E
EFFECT 42
F
FM MODE 48
Front panel 11
H
HDMI
YCBCR/RGB (HDMI) 62
HDMI RESOLUTION 61
HDMI SETUP 61
NIGHT 50
T
TEST TONE 65
TIME 38
TRACK SELECTION 63
TV TYPE 60
V
VIDEO SETUP 60
O
OSD 59
Q
Quick Setup 31
R
Rear panel 12
Region code 7
Remote control 13
Repeat Play 41
RESET 64
I
INTERVAL 42
79GB
‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪38 ANGLE‬‬
‫‪56 A/V SYNC‬‬
‫اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ‪42‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪42 ،36‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪38‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ت‬
‫‪58 DIMMER‬‬
‫‪57 DUAL MONO‬‬
‫‪50 DYNAMIC BASS‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺴﺎر ‪63‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ )‪60 (COMPONENT OUT‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪61 HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪64 SPEAKER‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪64‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪64‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ‪65 ،64‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪62‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪60‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪59‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪63‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫)‪62 YCBCR/RGB (HDMI‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪50 NIGHT‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪56 SLEEP‬‬
‫‪50 SOUND MODE‬‬
‫‪58 ،57 ،56 ،48 SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫ا‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎت ‪7‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪64‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺪة أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪64‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪5‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ ‪58‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻷﺑﻮي ‪63‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪51 HDMI‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪62 HDMI‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﳌﺠﺎل اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ‪62‬‬
‫اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ‪60 ،38‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ ‪41‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ‪40‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ‪41‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪59‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪31 Quick Setup‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪63‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪60‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت )‪62 (HDMI‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪58‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪59‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ‪42‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ‪59‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪11‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪12‬‬
‫م‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪59‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺳﻮد ‪61‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺳﻮد‬
‫)‪61 (COMPONENT OUT‬‬
‫ن‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان )‪61 (VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎر ‪65‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ‪60‬‬
‫و‬
‫وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪13‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪48 FM‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ‪61‬‬
‫خ‬
‫ﺧﺮج ‪60 4:3‬‬
‫د‬
‫دﻗﺔ ‪61 HDMI‬‬
‫دﻗﺔ ‪62 JPEG‬‬
‫ش‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ‪63‬‬
‫ص‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﺒﺚ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد ‪57‬‬
‫ق‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪39 DVD‬‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪16‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎة ‪ RETURN‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ‪62‬‬
‫ك‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻳﻮيك ‪43‬‬
‫‪43 ECHO‬‬
‫‪44 Karaoke Pon‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﻔﺘﺎح ‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻷﺻﻮات ‪44‬‬
‫ﻛﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪7‬‬
‫ل‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ أﻛﻮاد اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ‪78‬‬
‫‪79AR‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ أﻛﻮاد اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬
.(E/F) 1988 :ISO 639 ‫ﺗﻬﺠﺌﺔ اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻌﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Chinese
Zulu
1507
1508
1509
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1521
1525
1527
1528
1529
1531
1532
1534
1535
1538
1539
1540
1543
1557
1564
1572
1581
1587
1613
1632
1665
1684
1697
‫ﻏري ﻣﺤﺪّد‬
1703
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
Maori 1347
Macedonian 1349
Malayalam 1350
Mongolian 1352
Moldavian 1353
Marathi 1356
Malay 1357
Maltese 1358
Burmese 1363
Nauru 1365
Nepali 1369
Dutch 1376
Norwegian 1379
Occitan 1393
(Afan) Oromo 1403
Oriya 1408
Punjabi 1417
Polish 1428
Pushto; 1435
Pashto
Portuguese 1436
Quechua 1463
Rhaeto- 1481
Romance
Kirundi 1482
Romanian 1483
Russian 1489
Kinyarwanda 1491
Sanskrit 1495
Sindhi 1498
Sangho 1501
Serbo- 1502
Croatian
Singhalese 1503
Slovak 1505
Slovenian 1506
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Italian
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Lettish;
Latvian
Malagasy
1183
1186
1194
1196
1203
1209
1217
1226
1229
1233
1235
1239
1245
1248
1253
1254
1257
1261
1269
1283
1287
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1305
1307
1311
1313
1326
1327
1332
1334
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali;
Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
German
Bhutani
Greek
English
Esperanto
Spanish
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
French
Frisian
1027
1028
1032
1039
1044
1045
1051
1052
1053
1057
1059
1060
1061
1066
1345
1067
1070
1079
1093
1097
1103
1105
1109
1130
1142
1144
1145
1149
1150
1151
1157
1165
1166
1171
1174
1181
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ أﻛﻮاد اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻷﺑﻮي‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Thailand
United
Kingdom
2149
2499
2086
2528
2184
Mexico
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Pakistan
Philippines
Portugal
Russia
Singapore
2362
2376
2390
2379
2427
2424
2436
2489
2501
Finland
France
Germany
India
Indonesia
Italy
Japan
Korea
Malaysia
2165
2174
2109
2248
2238
2254
2276
2304
2363
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Brazil
Canada
Chile
China
Denmark
2044
2047
2046
2057
2070
2079
2090
2092
2115
78AR
‫أوﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺿﻤﻦ اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ]‪[MEDIA‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أو ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫]‪[VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫]‪MUSIC/‬‬
‫‪[PHOTO‬‬
‫]‪[PHOTO‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﴍاﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﴍاﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﴍاﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫]‪[MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪77AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫‪ 260‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 1,005‬ﻣﻠﻢ ×‬
‫‪ 260‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫)اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪ 1.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ )اﻟﺠﺰء ا ُﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 2.3‬ﻛﺠﻢ )اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ940K (SS-TS114‬‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫‪ 108‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 595‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪79‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ( )اﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ا ُﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 260‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 1,185‬ﻣﻠﻢ ×‬
‫‪ 260‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫)اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪ 1.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ )اﻟﺠﺰء ا ُﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 2.7‬ﻛﺠﻢ )اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪) WMA‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﻣﺘﺪاد اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪wma‬‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪192 -‬‬
‫اﻟﱰددات اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪) AAC‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﻣﺘﺪاد اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﱰددات اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﻣﺘﺪاد اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔري‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔري اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪avi‬‬
‫‪ Xvid‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ 4.854‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻛﺤﺪ‬
‫‪Xvid‬‬
‫أﻗﴡ(‬
‫اﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪل اﻹﻃﺎرات‪:‬‬
‫‪ 30 480 × 720‬إﻃﺎ ًرا ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 25 576 × 720‬إﻃﺎ ًرا ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫‪ 230‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 400‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪305‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔري‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔري اﻟﺼﻮت‪:‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 6.4‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )‪(SS-WS111‬‬
‫ﻋﺎم‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت ﺗﺎﻳﻮان‪:‬‬
‫‪ 120‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪،‬‬
‫‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 220‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷرﺟﻨﺘني‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪،‬‬
‫‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 110‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت أﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪،‬‬
‫‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ اﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 127‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪،‬‬
‫‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 220‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮى‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪،‬‬
‫‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 160 :‬وات‬
‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.3 :‬وات*‬
‫* ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– "‪ "DEMO‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ "‪."OFF‬‬
‫– ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ]‪.[OFF‬‬
‫‪ 430‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 55‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 350‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ( مبﺎ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺒﺎرزة‬
‫‪ 3.5‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫ﺻﻴﻎ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ MPEG 1) MP3‬اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪(3‬‬
‫‪76AR‬‬
‫‪m4a‬‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪320 -‬‬
‫اﻣﺘﺪاد اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪mp3‬‬
‫‪ 32‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪320 -‬‬
‫اﻟﱰددات اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 48/44.1/32‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫اﻣﺘﺪاد اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔري‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔري اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻹﻃﺎرات‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔري‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔري اﻟﺼﻮت‪:‬‬
‫‪:DRM‬‬
‫‪ MP4‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪m4v/mp4‬‬
‫‪ MPEG4‬اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ )‪AVC‬‬
‫ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 30‬إﻃﺎ ًرا ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪576 × 720‬‬
‫‪ HE-AAC) AAC-LC‬ﻏري‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ واﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴري دون إﺧﻄﺎر‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.3 :‬وات‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ أﻛرث ﻣﻦ ‪ 85%‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻔﺎءة اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﳌﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﳌﻀﺨﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼل اﳌﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.S-Master ،‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )اﳌﻘﺪر(‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )اﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ(‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪/‬ﺳامﻋﺔ اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى‪/‬‬
‫ﺳامﻋﺔ اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ 108 :‬وات‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 3‬أوم‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪1% ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻮه اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ(‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪/‬ﺳامﻋﺔ اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى‪/‬‬
‫ﺳامﻋﺔ اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ 167 :‬وات‬
‫)ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 3‬أوم‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ 165 :‬وات )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 3‬أوم‪،‬‬
‫‪ 80‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﳌﺪاﺧﻞ )اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪(AUDIO IN) TV‬‬
‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬
‫‪MIC‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ 250/450 :‬ﻣﻠﲇ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ 125/250 :‬ﻣﻠﲇ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ 1 :‬ﻣﻠﲇ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪(Audio Return Channel) TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪Dolby Digital :‬‬
‫‪ 5.1‬ﻗﻨﻮات‪ 5.1 DTS/‬ﻗﻨﻮات‪/‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ‪ PCM 2‬ﻗﻨﺎة )اﻟﱰدد‬
‫اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ‪ :‬أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪:DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬‬
‫‪(Audio Return Channel/OPTICAL IN) TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪Dolby Digital :‬‬
‫‪ 5.1‬ﻗﻨﻮات‪ 5.1 DTS/‬ﻗﻨﻮات‪/‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ‪ PCM 2‬ﻗﻨﺎة )اﻟﱰدد‬
‫اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ‪ :‬أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫اﻟﻬﻮايئ‬
‫أﻃﺮاف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ 50‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻟﺴﻠيك ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ 75‬أوم‪ ،‬ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮازن‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫اﳌﺨﺎرج‬
‫‪:DAV-DZ340K‬‬
‫‪:DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬‬
‫‪ 75 Vp-p 1 :VIDEO‬أوم‬
‫‪:COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪ 75 Vp-p 1 :Y‬أوم‬
‫‪ 75 Vp-p 0.7 :PR ،PB‬أوم‬
‫‪ :HDMI OUT‬اﻟﻨﻮع ‪A‬‬
‫)‪ 19‬ﺳﻨًﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ340K (SS-TS112‬‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫اﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫أﻗﴡ ﺗﻴﺎر‪:‬‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ( )اﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ا ُﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 260‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 1,185‬ﻣﻠﻢ ×‬
‫‪ 260‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫)اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪ 1.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ )اﻟﺠﺰء ا ُﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 2.7‬ﻛﺠﻢ )اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )‪(SS-CT111‬‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫‪ 500‬ﻣﻠﲇ أﻣﺒري‬
‫‪ 261‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 82‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 79‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 0.6‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ340K/DAV-DZ640K (SS-TS111‬‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺮددات رﻗﻤﻲ ‪PLL‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﻛﻮارﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮز اﻟﱪازﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫‪ 108‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 595‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪79‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫)‪:(USB‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪ 108‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 595‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪79‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ( )اﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ا ُﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 260‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 1,005‬ﻣﻠﻢ ×‬
‫‪ 260‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫)اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪ 1.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ )اﻟﺠﺰء ا ُﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 2.3‬ﻛﺠﻢ )اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K (SS-TS114‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪/‬أﻗﺮاص ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ 108‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 225‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 95‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 0.6‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ640K (SS-TS113‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻣﺪة اﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎث‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮاﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﺼامم اﻟﺜﻨﺎيئ ﻟﻠﻴﺰر‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻠﻴﺰر‪ :‬أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 44.6‬وات‬
‫* ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﺮج ﻫﻮ ﻗﻴﺎس اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﺸﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط اﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ مبﻘﺪار‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت أﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮى‪:‬‬
‫‪ 75 Vp-p 1 :VIDEO‬أوم‬
‫‪ :HDMI OUT‬اﻟﻨﻮع ‪A‬‬
‫)‪ 19‬ﺳﻨًﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺪاﺧﻞ )اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪:DAV-DZ340K/DAV-DZ640K‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮز اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 87.5‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ إﱃ ‪108.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 87.5‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ إﱃ ‪108.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ 100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫‪ 108‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 164‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 88‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ840K (SS-TS113‬‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ(‬
‫‪ 108‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ 595‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪79‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ( )اﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ا ُﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪75AR‬‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬايت‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر أﺣﺮف‪/‬أرﻗﺎم ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬايت ﳌﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫رﻗﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬رﻣﻮز )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (C 13 50‬ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮف و‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أو ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﰲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫‪C:13:50‬‬
‫أول ‪ 3‬رﻣﻮز ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺴﺒﺐ و‪/‬أو اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪C 13‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻧﻈﻒ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗامش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(67‬‬
‫‪E XX‬‬
‫ﳌﻨﻊ ﺣﺪوث ﻋﻄﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎم اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫)‪ XX‬ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ رﻗﻢ( اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ‪.‬‬
‫<اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب وﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Sony‬أو ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ Sony‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ وأﺧﱪه ﺑﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﳌﻜﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬رﻣﻮز‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪E 61 10 :‬‬
‫‪74AR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر رﻗﻢ اﻹﺻﺪار ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ اﻹﺻﺪار ]‪[VER.X.XX‬‬
‫)ﺣﻴﺚ ‪ X‬ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ رﻗﻢ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬وﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫أن ذﻟﻚ ﻻ ميﺜﻞ ﻋﻄ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪Sony‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬إﻻ أﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬أوﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟيك ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪VER.X.XX‬‬
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "PROTECT‬و"‪PUSH‬‬
‫‪ "PWR‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎدل‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ "/1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬وﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻔﺎء "‪:"STANDBY‬‬
‫– ﻫﻞ ﻫﻨﺎك داﺋﺮة ﻗﴫ ﺑﺄﺳﻼك اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ‪ +‬و–؟‬
‫– ﻫﻞ ﻫﻨﺎك أي ﳾء ﻳﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم؟‬
‫– ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد أﻋﻼه وﺣﻞ أﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻌﺬر ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺒﺐ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﻮاردة أﻋﻼه‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﴩ أﻗﺮب وﻛﻴﻞ ‪.Sony‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎف ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ مبﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ )‪ . (USB‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ )‪ . (USB‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬وﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺮار منﻂ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب وﻛﻴﻞ ‪.Sony‬‬
‫• اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Sony‬أو ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Sony‬اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪"OVERLOAD‬‬
‫و"‪ "REMOVE‬و"‪ ،"USB‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."PUSH PWR‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "LOCKED‬وﻻ ميﻜﻦ إﺧﺮاج‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪."DATA ERR‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض "‪ "READING‬ﳌﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫• اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻻ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻣﺘﺪاد اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‪ .‬اﻧﻈﺮ »اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪) «USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(5‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ‪.DCF‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮق ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮاءة ﻣﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– وﺟﻮد ﻋﺪد ﻛﺒري ﻣﻦ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫– ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻌﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻛﺒرية ﺟﺪًا‪.‬‬
‫– اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ إﱃ أﺟﺰاء ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪73AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪث ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ • .USB‬ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أو ﻗﻄﻊ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﺴﺢ‪ .‬اﺣﺬف اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أو اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﺟﺰيئ ‪.‬إذا مل ﻳﺆد ذﻟﻚ إﱃ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺗﺎﻟ ًﻔﺎ‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﻮارد ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬وﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب وﻛﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪.Sony‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ أن ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺤﻤ ًﻴﺎ ﺿﺪ اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻬﻮايئ أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮايئ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ إذا ﻟﺰم اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻮة إﺷﺎرة اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻛﺒﻼً ﻣﺤﻮرﻳًﺎ مبﻘﺎوﻣﺔ ‪ 75‬أوم )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻬﻮايئ ‪ FM‬ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ‪ FM‬رديء‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ • .‬اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ اﳌﻜﻮن اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪.[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪاد اﳌﻜﻮن اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .HDMI‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮن‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴري وﺻﻠﺔ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد واﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬أو إذا ﺣﺪث ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫• ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ »اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ‪«"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(51‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أﺛﻨﺎء • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ • .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ »اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ‪«"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(51‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‬
‫‪72AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(43‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك أﺣﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻣﺘﺪاد اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ أو ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻏري ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬اﻧﻈﺮ »اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪) «USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(5‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪاد ]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ أن ﻋﺪد اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻫﻮ ‪ 200‬أو أﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ أن ﻋﺪد ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 150‬أو أﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺸﻔﺮة أو اﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠامت ﻣﺮور أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ وﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪) 3,072‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 2,048‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬أو أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 2,000,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ رﺋﻴﴘ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ اﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪) 720‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 576‬ارﺗﻔﺎع(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ WMA‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ WMA DRM‬أو ‪ WMA Lossless‬أو ‪.WMA PRO‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ AAC‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ AAC DRM‬أو ‪.AAC Lossless‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﺮض اﻷرﻗﺎم واﻷﺣﺮف اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬وﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.WMA‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.AAC‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ أﺳامء اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ميﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮاءة اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻗﺘًﺎ أﻃﻮل ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻌﺘﺎد ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– وﺟﻮد ﻋﺪد ﻛﺒري ﻣﻦ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫– ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻌﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻛﺒرية ﺟﺪًا‪.‬‬
‫– ﺣﺠﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻛﺒري ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ إﱃ أﺟﺰاء ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.AAC‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز • ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ًﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻏري ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن اﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺨﺬ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ إﱃ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫آﺧﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ FAT12‬أو ‪ FAT16‬أو ‪ ،FAT32‬واﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫• رمبﺎ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ‪.‬‬
‫– وﺻﻞ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت واﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬إﱃ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺿﺪ اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﴎﻋﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﻞ واﳌﺴﺢ ﺗﺘﻜﺮر ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن ﻫﻴﻜﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت داﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻘﺪًا‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﻮارد ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬وﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب وﻛﻴﻞ ‪.Sony‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ‪.‬‬
‫• وﺻﻞ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت واﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬إﱃ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪71AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD/‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺸﻮه‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ .‬اﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺸﻔﺮة مبﻌﺪﻻت ﺑﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻔري ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﺎن‬
‫إﱃ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎك ﺿﻮﺿﺎء أو ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ • اﻧﺴﺦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت إﱃ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ FAT12‬أو ‪ FAT16‬أو ‪ FAT32‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫اﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻔﺖ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬وﻗﺪ ﺗﺆدي إﱃ إﺗﻼف اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت‪ .‬أﺧﺮج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ واﺗﺮك اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺪة ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت أو‬
‫اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪DATA CD/‬‬
‫‪.DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ أﺳامء اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ x‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻢ اﺑﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(37‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﻏري ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ISO 9660‬اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪ 1/‬اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪ 2 ،‬أو ‪.Joliet‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻏري ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.(Universal Disk Format) UDF‬‬
‫• اﻣﺘﺪاد اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ أو ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻏري ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬اﻧﻈﺮ »اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪/‬اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) «USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(5‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪاد ]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ أن ﻋﺪد اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻫﻮ ‪ 200‬أو أﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ أن ﻋﺪد ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 150‬أو أﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪) 3,072‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 2,048‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬أو أﻛﱪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 2,000,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ رﺋﻴﴘ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ اﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪) 720‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 576‬ارﺗﻔﺎع(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﺮض اﻷرﻗﺎم واﻷﺣﺮف اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬وﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪70AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ x‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻢ اﺑﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(37‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ دﻋﻢ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻏري ‪ FAT12‬أو ‪ FAT16‬أو ‪*.FAT32‬‬
‫* ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪ FAT12‬و ‪ FAT16‬و ‪ ،FAT32‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أو اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺠﺰءًا إﱃ أﻗﺴﺎم‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺴﻢ اﻷول‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪث ﻋﺪم اﻧﺘﻈﺎم ﻟﻸﻟﻮان ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﺳامﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ أﺟﺰاء ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬا ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﺸﻮه ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪوث ﻋﺪم‬
‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎم ﻟﻸﻟﻮان ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 0.3‬ﻣﱰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﻧﺘﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان‪ ،‬ﻓﺄوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أوﻻ‪ ً،‬ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 15‬إﱃ ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد أي ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ )ﻣﺰﻻج ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز رﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﺤﻲ‪ ،‬أو‬
‫دﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ( ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• أﻋﺪ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ أﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [YCBCR‬ﰲ ])‪ [YCBCR/RGB (HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [RGB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻏري ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ مبﺎ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮن‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎيئ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أو‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت( اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز إﱃ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪ PlayStation 3‬أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ( ﻣﺒﺎﴍةً‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (26‬وﺣﺪد وﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪."TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻋﱪ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺳامﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ • DIGITAL‬اﻟﱰدد اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ أﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪IN OPTICAL (DAV-DZ840K/‬‬
‫‪ DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج ﺻﻮت رﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ]‪[AUTO‬‬
‫‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫‪.Audio Return Channel‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Audio Return Channel‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬مبﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Audio Return‬‬
‫‪.Channel‬‬
‫• اﻟﱰدد اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ أﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺒﺎﴍة ًﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳامع ﻃﻨني أو ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺷﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• اﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﻌﻴﺪًا ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﻒ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﻘﺪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺆﺛﺮ اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ • ﺣﺪد اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬أو ‪ CD‬أو ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج ﺻﻮت أو ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳامﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ أو‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ وﺻﻼت وإﻋﺪادات اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(64 ،25‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮن إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺨﺮج ﻫﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪ 5.1‬ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ • .‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج ﺻﻮت ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮن اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪69AR‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎف اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ وﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫إذا واﺟﻬﺖ أ ًﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪم دﻟﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎف اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ وﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻫﺬا ﳌﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ‬
‫اﻹﺻﻼح‪ .‬وﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﻤﺮار أﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﴩ أﻗﺮب وﻛﻴﻞ ‪.Sony‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎم أﻓﺮاد اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺟﺰاء أﺛﻨﺎء اﻹﺻﻼح‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﻬﺬه اﻷﺟﺰاء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎم‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫• اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑني وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ واﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻋﻦ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺠﺪاري‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺎﱄ )ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ أن ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺟﻊ إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫اﻻﻓﱰاﺿﻴﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ "/1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬و‪ FUNCTION‬و‪ "/1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "RESET‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ واﻟﺤﻠﻮل‬
‫• ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻏري ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺨﺮج ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮرة ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ • .HDMI‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز دﺧﻞ ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪High-bandwidth Digital Content) HDCP‬‬
‫‪.(Protection‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮرة ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ )‪DAV-DZ640K/DAV-‬‬
‫‪ DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪68AR‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻟﺨﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪) HDMI OUT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(61‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز واﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏري ‪ ،HDMI OUT‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ دﺧﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫إﱃ دﺧﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ميﻜﻨﻚ رؤﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮوض اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ،HDMI OUT‬وﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ دﺧﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى إﱃ ‪ .HDMI‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ اﻵن‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﺮر اﻟﺨﻄﻮات وﺟﺮب اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻗﺒﻮل اﻹﺷﺎرة ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬أرﺟﻊ اﻹﻋﺪاد إﱃ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ )اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(60 ،32‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ])‪ [PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT‬ﰲ]‪[VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (60‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺬر ﻗﺒﻮل اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﻺﺷﺎرة اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ ]‪.[OFF‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ (525p/625p) ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪،‬أرﺟﻊ اﻹﻋﺪاد إﱃ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ )اﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(60 ،32‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم متﺮ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬ﻟﺘﺼﻞ إﱃ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ إﺷﺎرة ﺣامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ا ُﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﺒﺎﴍة ًﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪاد ]‪ [TV TYPE‬ﰲ ]‪) [VIDEO SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض إﱃ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎظ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ اﻟﻮرق أو اﻷﴍﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أو ﻣﺼﺎدر‬
‫اﻟﺤﺮارة ﻣﺜﻞ أﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ اﻟﻬﻮاء اﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪ ،‬أو ﺗﱰﻛﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎرة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﰲ أﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒري داﺧﻞ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎوﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻒ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗامش ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﺴﺢ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﳌﺬﻳﺒﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ أو اﻟﺘرن أو اﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎت‬
‫اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮاق أو اﻟﺒﺨﺎﺧﺎت اﳌﻘﺎوﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻹﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ LP‬اﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺪاﺋﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻏري اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ وﻏري اﻟﺪاﺋﺮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ أو اﻟﻘﻠﺐ أو اﻟﻨﺠﻢ( ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻄ ًﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮاق‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﳌﻠﺼﻘﺎت أو اﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪67AR‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺠﺪاري إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻮي اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻔﱰة زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬اﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫وﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل وﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫• ﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺟﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺤﺮارة داﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم مبﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻔﱰات زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺎوﻳﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ذﻟﻚ ﻋﻄ ًﻼ‪ .‬وﺑﺮﻏﻢ‬
‫ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺣﺎوﻳﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻴﻘﺔ ردﻳﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺸﻜﻞ زاﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ أي ﳾء ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ .‬ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻣﺰود مبﻀﺨﻢ ﻗﺪرة ﻋﺎلٍ ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻧﺴﺪاد ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﻳﺤﺪث ﺑﻪ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ )اﻟﺴﺠﺎد واﻟﺒﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎت وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ( أو‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﳌﻮاد )اﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ وأﻏﻄﻴﺔ اﻷﺛﺎث( اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺤﺮارة‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﳌﺪاﻓﺊ‪ ،‬أو‬
‫أﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ اﻟﻬﻮاء أو ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﻌﺮض ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أو اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰاﺋﺪة أو اﻻﻫﺘﺰاز اﳌﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴيك أو اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﺪر‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫أﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﻌﻴﺪًا ﻋﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت ذات اﻷﺟﺰاء‬
‫اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ أﻓﺮان اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮووﻳﻒ أو ﻣﻜﱪات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻀﺨﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﺟﺴﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ًة ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎرد إﱃ آﺧﺮ داﻓﺊ‪ ،‬أو ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻪ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ رﻃﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت‬
‫داﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬وﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪوث ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬أﺧﺮج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ واﺗﺮك اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﳌﺪة ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮط أي ﳾء داﺧﻞ ﺣﺎوﻳﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل أﻓﺮاد ﻣﺆﻫﻠني ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة‬
‫أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪66AR‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ مبﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ أو ﺑﺪون إﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ذي ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻋﺎلٍ ﻓﺠﺄة‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫• ﻧﻈﻒ ﺣﺎوﻳﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ وﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗامش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ مبﺤﻠﻮل ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﺘﺪل ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أي ﻧﻮع‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺳﺎدات اﻟﻜﺎﺷﻄﺔ أو ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻘﻞ أو اﳌﺬﻳﺒﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺤﻮل أو اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻳﺔ أﺳﺌﻠﺔ أو ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻓريﺟﻰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب وﻛﻴﻞ ‪.Sony‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪/‬اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ أو ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪/‬اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت‬
‫)مبﺎ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﻧﻮاع اﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ أو اﻟﺒﺨﺎﺧﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆدي إﱃ ﺣﺪوث‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل أﻟﻮان اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫• إذا ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﰲ ﻋﺪم اﻧﺘﻈﺎم أﻟﻮان ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﻓﺄوﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 15‬إﱃ ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬وﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﻧﺘﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ أﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫إﺧﻄﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻗﺎدر ﻋﲆ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ أو‬
‫ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻏري ﻣﺤﺪود‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮك ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ أو ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﻔﱰة زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﱃ اﺣﺘامل ﺣﺪوث ﺗﻠﻒ داﺋﻢ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬وﺗﻌﺘﱪ‬
‫أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻹﺳﻘﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﲆ وﺟﻪ اﻟﺨﺼﻮص‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬واﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻋﻦ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺠﺪاري‪.‬‬
‫]‪ +2.0 [SUBWOOFER‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ :‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﺠﻬﺎر‬
‫اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪[LEVEL (SURROUND)] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﺳامﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ –6.0‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ إﱃ ‪ +6.0‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [TEST TONE‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ 0.0 [L/R‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ :‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺳامﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪[TEST TONE] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫]‪.[TEST TONE‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [TEST TONE‬ﻋﲆ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪر ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﺼﺪر ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻮاﱄ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/X/x/c‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ واﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮر اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/X/x/c‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [TEST TONE‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪ [OFF‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪65AR‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪[MULTI-DISC RESUME] x‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ آﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮة ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﰲ‬
‫اﳌﺮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺨﺰن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻧﻘﺎط اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﳌﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ‬
‫‪ 10‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺰن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻧﻘﺎط اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ .‬وﻳﺒﺪأ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻣﺘﻼء ذاﻛﺮة اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻗﺪم أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪[RESET] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إرﺟﺎع إﻋﺪادات ]‪ [SETUP‬ﺑﺨﻼف ]‪PARENTAL‬‬
‫‪ [CONTROL‬إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻻﻓﱰاﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[YES‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ واﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ [NO‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ [/1‬أﺛﻨﺎء إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮق‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﻊ دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻮد إﻋﺪادات ]‪ [MEDIA‬و]‪ [INTERVAL‬و]‪[EFFECT‬‬
‫‪[CONNECTION] x‬‬
‫]‪[FRONT‬‬
‫]‪[YES‬‬
‫]‪[CENTER‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﺣﺪد ﻋﺎد ًة ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[NONE‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SURROUND‬‬
‫]‪ :[YES‬ﺣﺪد ﻋﺎد ًة ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[NONE‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳامﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫]‪[YES‬‬
‫‪[DISTANCE] x‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮت إﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﻤﺘﺎع‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ أن‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1.0‬إﱃ ‪ 7.0‬أﻣﺘﺎر ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫وﻣﻦ ‪ 0.0‬إﱃ ‪ 7.0‬أﻣﺘﺎر ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ وﺳامﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻌﺬر ﻋﻠﻴﻚ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ إﱃ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع مبﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﱰ‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻌﺬر ﻋﻠﻴﻚ وﺿﻊ ﺳامﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺳامﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ إﱃ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع مبﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 5.0‬أﻣﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻻﻓﱰاﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫]‪[SPEAKER SETUP‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻳﺪو ًﻳﺎ دون إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪.Quick Setup‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬واﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪TEST‬‬
‫‪.[TONE‬‬
‫]‪ 3.0 [FRONT‬م‪ :‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ 3.0 [CENTER‬م‪ :‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )ميﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ مبﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﱰ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ 3.0 [SURROUND‬م‪ :‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺳامﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ مبﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫إﱃ ‪ 5.0‬أﻣﺘﺎر(‪.‬‬
‫‪[LEVEL (FRONT)] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ واﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ وﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ –6.0‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ إﱃ ‪ 0‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻟـ ]‪،[L/R‬‬
‫وﻣﻦ ‪ –6.0‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ إﱃ ‪ +6.0‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻟـ ]‪[CENTER‬‬
‫و]‪ .[SUBWOOFER‬اﺣﺮص ﻋﲆ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[TEST TONE‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ 0.0 [L/R‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ :‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ 0.0 [CENTER‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ :‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪64AR‬‬
‫‪[TRACK SELECTION] x‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﻄﺎء اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ أﻋﲆ ﻋﺪد‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪة ﺻﻴﻎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت )ﺻﻮت ‪ PCM‬أو‬
‫‪ DTS‬أو ‪ Dolby Digital‬أو ‪.(MPEG‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ أو أﻋﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[STANDARD‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮاﻓﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮى ﺣﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﺤﺪد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﺣﺴﺐ اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﲆ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐري اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪاد ]‪ [TRACK SELECTION‬ﻋﲆ إﻋﺪادات ]‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫ﰲ ]‪) [LANGUAGE SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) .(59‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[OTHERS t‬ﺣﺪد ﻛﻮدًا ﻗﻴﺎﺳ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫وأدﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ »ﻻﺋﺤﺔ أﻛﻮاد اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻷﺑﻮي«‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (78‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[LEVEL‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬
‫ﻛﻠام ﻗﻠﺖ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎن اﻟﺤﺪ أﻛرث ﴏاﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻌﺮض )ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻈﻼل(‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫أي زر )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (N‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫‪[SCREEN SAVER] x‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪[PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [LEVEL‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻟﻬﺎ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪PARENTAL‬‬
‫‪[CONTROL‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﳌﺪة ‪ 15‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ واﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،N‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ .‬أدﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪[BACKGROUND] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮن أو ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮة ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[JACKET PICTURE‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻐﻼف )ﺻﻮرة‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻐﻼف ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ .(CD-EXTRA‬وﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﺣﺘﻮاء‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮرة ﻏﻼف‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[GRAPHICS‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[BLUE‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ زرﻗﺎء‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[BLACK‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﻮداء‪.‬‬
‫‪[PARENTAL CONTROL] x‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [PARENTAL CONTROL‬ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬ذات اﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎت‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ ﺣﺠﺐ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ أو اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ مبﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬ﻓﺄدﺧﻞ "‪ "199703‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮور‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮور ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ إدﺧﺎل اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.N‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪ ،[PASSWORD t‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮور ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ارﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ أﺛﻨﺎء إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪63AR‬‬
‫‪[CONTROL FOR HDMI] x‬‬
‫‪[JPEG RESOLUTION] x‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ دﻗﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﱰك ﺑني اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪[AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL] x‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Audio Return Channel‬‬
‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[Off‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮن ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪CONTROL FOR‬‬
‫‪ [HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫‪[YCBCR/RGB (HDMI)] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة ‪ HDMI‬اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[YCBCR‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ‪.YCBCR‬‬
‫]‪ :[RGB‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ‪.RGB‬‬
‫‪[AUDIO (HDMI)] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫] ‪ :[SD‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺪﻗﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ إﻃﺎر أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫] ‪ :[HD‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻮح ‪ HD‬ﻣﻊ إﻃﺎر‬
‫أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[HD‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻮح ‪ HD‬دون إﻃﺎر‬
‫أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫] ‪ :[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻮح ‪ HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻊ إﻃﺎر أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻮح‬
‫‪ HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ دون إﻃﺎر أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮن اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪ [JPEG RESOLUTION‬ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [TV TYPE‬ﰲ ]‪ [VIDEO SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ ،[16:9‬وﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [HDMI RESOLUTION‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ إﻋﺪاد‬
‫آﺧﺮ ﻏري ]‪ [720 × 480p‬أو ]‪.[720 × 480/576p‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] ‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬أو ])× ‪1920‬‬
‫‪ [1080i) HD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [HDMI RESOLUTION‬ﰲ‬
‫]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪.[1920 × 1080i‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ إﺷﺎرة ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻗﻴﺎم اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أو إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أو‬
‫‪.DATA DVD‬‬
‫– ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أو إزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫]‪[AUDIO SETUP‬‬
‫‪[AUDIO DRC] x‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﺷﺎرات ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ Digital‬أو ‪ DTS‬أو ‪ PCM‬ﺑﱰدد ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 24/‬ﺑﺖ إﱃ‬
‫إﺷﺎرات ‪ PCM‬ﺑﱰدد ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 16/‬ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ اﳌﺠﺎل اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮن اﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫]‪ [AUDIO DRC‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪًا ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﻓﻼم مبﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﳾء آﺧﺮ ﻏري "‪ "DVD/CD‬أو "‪،"USB‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ اﳌﺠﺎل اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[STANDARD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﻧﺘﺎج ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻨﻮع‬
‫اﳌﺠﺎل اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك اﻟﺬي ﻗﺼﺪه ﻣﻬﻨﺪس اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MAX‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﳌﺠﺎل اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪ [AUDIO DRC‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪62AR‬‬
‫]‪ :[FULL‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫إﱃ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[NORMAL‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض إﱃ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮض إﱃ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 16:9‬ﻣﻊ أﴍﻃﺔ ﺳﻮداء ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻮاﻧﺐ‬
‫اﻟﻴﴪى واﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض إﱃ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪16:9‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮن اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪ [4:3 OUTPUT‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[TV TYPE‬‬
‫ﰲ ]‪ [VIDEO SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪.[16:9‬‬
‫‪[BLACK LEVEL (COMPONENT OUT)] x‬‬
‫)ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-‬‬
‫‪ DZ940K‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ وﺗﺎﻳﻮان ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺳﻮد )ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪.VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﻛام أﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺳﻮد ﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺨﺮج ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ميﻜﻨﻚ زﻳﺎدة ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺳﻮد اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺳﻮداء ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪[PAUSE MODE] x‬‬
‫‪[COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD)] x‬‬
‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ‪ PAL‬أو ‪ .NTSC‬إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻧﻈﺎم‬
‫‪ ،DUAL‬ﻓﺤﺪد ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫]‪ :[PAL‬ﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺘﻐﻴري إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ NTSC‬وﻳﺨﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ‪.PAL‬‬
‫]‪ :[NTSC‬ﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺘﻐﻴري إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ PAL‬وﻳﺨﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫‪[BLACK LEVEL] x‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت أﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ وﺗﺎﻳﻮان ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺳﻮد )ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺨﻼف‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (DAV-DZ640K/‬‬
‫‪ DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪HDMI/‬‬
‫‪.OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬اﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺳﻮد اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ ،‬مبﺎ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﺟﺴﺎم اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﺸﻜﻞ دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك‪ ،‬دون أي ﺗﺬﺑﺬب‪ .‬ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[FRAME‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ ،‬مبﺎ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﺟﺴﺎم اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﺸﻜﻞ دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫)ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت إﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ وآﺳﻴﺎ واﻟﻬﻨﺪ واﻟﴩق اﻷوﺳﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪.CD‬‬
‫)أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD VIDEO/DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ‪HDMI‬‬
‫]‪[HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫‪[HDMI RESOLUTION] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]‪ :[(AUTO (1920 × 1080p‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أﻓﻀﻞ إﺷﺎرة‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[1920 × 1080i‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪× 1920‬‬
‫‪.*1080i‬‬
‫]‪ :[1280 × 720p‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪× 1280‬‬
‫‪.*720p‬‬
‫]‪ :**[720 × 480p‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪× 720‬‬
‫‪.*480p‬‬
‫* ‪ :i‬ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ :p ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫** ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪.[720 × 480/576p‬‬
‫‪61AR‬‬
‫‪[AUDIO] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[ORIGINAL‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ذات اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[4:3 PAN SCAN‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض إﱃ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻮرة ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وﻳﻘﻄﻊ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻼمئﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪[SUBTITLE] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟامت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪.VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[AUDIO FOLLOW‬ﺗﺘﻐري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟامت‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪدﺗﻬﺎ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪[PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT)] x‬‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﰲ ]‪ [MENU‬أو ]‪ [AUDIO‬أو ]‪[SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﻏري ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺣﺪى‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ )وﺣﺴﺐ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [OTHERS t‬ﰲ ]‪ [MENU‬و]‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫و]‪ ،[SUBTITLE‬ﺣﺪد ﻛﻮد ﻟﻐﺔ وأدﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ »ﻻﺋﺤﺔ أﻛﻮاد‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (80‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫]‪[VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ .COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ »ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪«COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪،[ON‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد اﻹﻋﺪادات ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[START‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﳌﺪة ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮانٍ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪[TV TYPE] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض إﱃ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ]‪ ،[ON‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[YES‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[NO‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[16:9‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺎز ذي ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ أو ﺗﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﺰود ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮن اﻹﻋﺪاد ])‪[PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫]‪ :[4:3 LETTER BOX‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎز ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض إﱃ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺻﻮرة ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ ﴍاﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ واﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪60AR‬‬
‫‪[4:3 OUTPUT] x‬‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض إﱃ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،16:9‬ميﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض إﱃ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻹﺷﺎرات ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‬
‫إﱃ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .4:3‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض إﱃ‬
‫اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬وﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫إﺟﺮاء اﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪[TV TYPE] :‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت اﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮر واﻷﺻﻮات‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ واﳌﻮدﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪4:3 LETTERFULL‬‬
‫‪BOX‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD)4:3‬‬
‫‪: PAN SCAN‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬وﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[SETUP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪4:3 LETTER BOX‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪FULL‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [LANGUAGE SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(59‬‬
‫]‪) [VIDEO SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬
‫]‪) [HDMI SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(61‬‬
‫]‪) [AUDIO SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(62‬‬
‫]‪) [SYSTEM SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬
‫]‪) [SPEAKER SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﻋﺪاد وﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪[4:3 LETTER BOX] :‬‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ إﻋﺪادات ]‪[SETUP‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ إﻋﺪادات ]‪ ،[SETUP‬اﻧﻈﺮ ]‪[RESET‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض أو ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫]‪[LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪[VIDEO SETUP] :‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪FULL‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪة ﻟﻐﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫أو ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪) [OSD] x‬اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪[MENU] x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪59AR‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Quick Setup‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"DIMMER‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫أو ‪.c‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ درﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"OFF‬ﺗﻜﻮن ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"ON‬ﺗﻜﻮن ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[QUICK‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"DEMO‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫أو ‪.c‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫• "‪ :"ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪58AR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫]‪ ،[SETUP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﳌﺪة ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ وﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم إﺧﺮاج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻟﻠﺼﻮت‬
‫ﳌﺪة ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪأ "‪ "AUTO.STBY‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﳌﺪة دﻗﻴﻘﺘني ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ دﺧﻮل‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف وﻇﻴﻔﺔ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪ Quick Setup‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع‬
‫»إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪) «Quick Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(31‬‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫• ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘام ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ."ON‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﱃ‬
‫ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮاز ‪ ،DAV-DZ940K‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﴍ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪.VOLUME‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"AUTO.STBY‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ أو ‪.c‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫• "‪ :"ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺒﺚ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد‬
‫)‪(DUAL MONO‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺒﺚ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أو‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﺷﺎرة ﺑﺚ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة ‪ ،Dolby Digital‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أو‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮن آﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻠﻚ رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﴫي* )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫وإذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Audio Return Channel‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(52‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪.HDMI‬‬
‫* ‪ DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﺴﺘﻮى دﺧﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺴني ﺗﺸﻮه ﺻﻮت اﳌﻜﻮن اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ AUDIO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"ATT‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.c‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫• "‪ :"ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"OFF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫أو‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼمئﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"MAIN‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"SUB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"MAIN+SUB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ واﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪"TV‬‬
‫أو "‪."AUDIO IN‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪57AR‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﺑني اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻟﻴﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﰲ وﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮم أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[A/V SYNC‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SLEEP‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،SLEEP‬ﻳﺘﻐري ﻋﺮض اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫)اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ( مبﻌﺪل ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼع ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "OFF‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"SLEEP‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫أو ‪.c‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪56AR‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐري ﻋﺮض اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ )اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ( مبﻌﺪل ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﺑني اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[A/V SYNC‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﺑني اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪ [A/V SYNC‬ﻓﻌﺎﻻً‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ REC TO USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء ‪ REC TO USB‬وﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "READING‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪"PUSH PLAY‬‬
‫واﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎدل ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻛﺘامل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "COMPLETE‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ وﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.x‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ رادﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮاﱄ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت )"‪ ".mp3‬أو "‪ ".wma‬أو‬
‫"‪ (".m4a‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ﻣﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎت( اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.CLEAR‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮت واﺣﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ و‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.CLEAR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."FM‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ PRESET +/‬أو‬
‫–‪.TUNING +/‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ REC TO USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء ‪ REC TO USB‬وﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪"PLEASE WAIT‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪"PUSH PLAY‬‬
‫واﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎدل ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎن اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻏري‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ أو ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[YES‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ]‪ ،[NO‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼمئﺔ‬
‫‪ x‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ إﻟﻴﻪ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."USB‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ x‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ REC TO USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "NEW TRK‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ وﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ًة ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪REC TO‬‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ REC TO USB‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺧﻼل ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮانٍ ‪ ،‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪55AR‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ رادﻳﻮ‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫"‪"FM001‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫"‪"TRACK001‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 64‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻢ )مبﺎ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻻﻣﺘﺪاد(‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ رﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ رﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "REC1-MP3‬أو‬
‫"‪ "REC1-CD‬ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﳌﺴﺎر واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎرات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ﻓﺮدﻳﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.5‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻹزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫‪USB TRANSFER‬‬
‫‪START‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬إﱃ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.CD/DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[USB TRANSFER‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫‪USB TRANSFER‬‬
‫‪2002_Remixes‬‬
‫‪START‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ واﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﱃ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.5‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [TRACK‬أو ]‪،[FOLDER‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ .DATA CD/DATA DVD‬وميﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/X/x/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [x ALL‬ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ CD‬اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ( أو ]‪) [ ALL‬ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/‬‬
‫‪ ،(DATA DVD‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ]‪ ،[s ALL‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/X/x/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[START‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.x‬‬
‫‪54AR‬‬
‫‪01_Back_Seat_O...‬‬
‫‪02_One_Nights_...‬‬
‫‪03_Are_You_Ma...‬‬
‫‪04_I_Can_Lose_...‬‬
‫‪05_Soul_Survivo...‬‬
‫‪06_Strangers_B...‬‬
‫‪07_Stay_maxi_ve...‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎرات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪TRACK‬‬
‫‪TRACK‬‬
‫‪TRACK‬‬
‫‪TRACK‬‬
‫‪TRACK‬‬
‫‪TRACK‬‬
‫‪TRACK‬‬
‫‪TRACK‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ زر واﺣﺪة‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪.REC TO USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD/DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.x‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﱃ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.4‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد اﳌﺴﺎر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.N‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﻏﺎين إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﻏﺎين اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ أو‬
‫ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺗﺸﻔريﻫﺎ إﱃ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ .MP3‬وميﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬اﻧﻈﺮ »ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) «USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.MEMORY SELECT‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫‪USB Memory 2 selected.‬‬
‫‪Home Theatre System‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺘﴫ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺨﺎص ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺘﺠﺎوز ﻫﺬا اﻟﺤﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل‬
‫ﻋﲆ إذن ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻣﲇ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻮزع‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬مبﻌﺪل ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA‬‬
‫‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﺪل ﺑﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫‪ MP3‬اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ رادﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪MP3‬‬
‫مبﻌﺪل ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﰲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫‪ MP3‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎؤﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫اﻛﺘامﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﻟﺬي ﻛﺎن ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎؤه‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻧﻔﺎد اﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– وﺻﻮل ﻋﺪد اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺪد اﻟﺬي ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 199‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪًا ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎن اﳌﺠﻠﺪ أو اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺤﺎول ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدًا ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ رﻗﻢ ﻻﺣﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻢ دون اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﳌﺠﻠﺪ أو اﳌﻠﻒ اﻷﺻﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻐري رﻗﻢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪد وﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﺠﻠﺪات واﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ "‪"MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ًة أﺳﻔﻞ "‪ ."ROOT‬وﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﺠﻠﺪات واﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫داﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﻫﺬا ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻘﻞ واﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﺪة ﻣﺴﺎرات ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ أو ﻋﺪة‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫اﳌﺼﺪر‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪Audio CD‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼمئﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﱪ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪[Operation not possible.‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫"‪"FLDR001‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫‪(2‬‬
‫"‪"TRACK001‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر واﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ أو ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ MP3‬واﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫اﳌﺼﺪر‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪Audio CD‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫"‪"REC1-MP3‬‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫"‪"REC1-CD‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫"‪"TRACK001‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫‪53AR‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ زر واﺣﺪة‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ONE-TOUCH PLAY‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﱪ ﻗﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت وﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﱪ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز وﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻋﲆ دﺧﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح‬
‫)وﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح(‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ وﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع‬
‫ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮدة ﺻﻮرة وﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼم‪ ،‬ﻛام أﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.THEATRE‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼل ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم(‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت وﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ [/1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺳامﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﺳامﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز إﱃ أدىن ﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﰲ وﺿﻊ ‪) PAP‬ﺻﻮرة وﺻﻮرة(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ ‪ ،PAP‬ﺗﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﺮج اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز إﱃ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.PAP‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز وﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪52AR‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫)‪(Audio Return Channel‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ .Audio Return Channel‬وميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻋﱪ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم مبﺠﺮد اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬واﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ ]‪[AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﱪ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﱪ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ﺧﺮج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰاﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫)اﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐري ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ‪"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ [/1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪد اﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫اﻟﻮاردة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﱪ دﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪."DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[HDMI SETUP‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪ ،[SETUP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﺸﱰك ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ‪) CEC‬ﻧﺎﻗﻞ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬
‫اﻹﻟﻜﱰوﻧﻴﺎت اﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ( ﻣﻊ ‪High-Definition) HDMI‬‬
‫‪.(Multimedia Interface‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﻜﻮن اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ .HDMI‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[ON‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ‪ - HDMI‬اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺴﻬﻞ(‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ‪- HDMI‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪CONTROL FOR‬‬
‫‪ [HDMI‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼمئﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﳌﺰودة ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪."BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت ‪ Sony‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻛرث ﺑﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫– إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫– اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫– وﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫– اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫– ‪) Audio Return Channel‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫– اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫– اﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻠﻐﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪CONTROL FOR‬‬
‫‪ ،[HDMI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰاﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫)إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰر ‪ POWER‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أو ‪ TV [/1‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﻳﻜﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ‪- HDMI‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻳﺪو ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ‬
‫إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ﻣﻀﻐﻮط أو‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪51AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼمئﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.DYNAMIC BASS‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺆﺛﺮ اﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "BASS ON‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺳﺘﺔ أوﺿﺎع ﺻﻮت ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﱪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ اﳌﺼﺪر‬
‫أو ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮيت‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر اﻷﺻﲇ مبﺠﺮد ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ أﺣﺪ أوﺿﺎع اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮيت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DYNAMIC BASS‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SOUND MODE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"STANDARD‬ﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮيت‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻓﻼم أو اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"CLEAR VOICE‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬
‫اﻟﺤﻮار ﻟﻸﺻﻮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺳامﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"MOVIE‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺻﻮ ًﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ًﺒﺎ ﻟﻸﻓﻼم‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن‬
‫اﳌﺼﺪر اﻷﺻﲇ ﺛﻨﺎيئ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﺤﺎيك ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻈﺎم ﻓﻚ اﻟﺘﺸﻔري ‪،Dolby Pro Logic‬‬
‫وﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"HI-FI‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺻﻮ ًﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ًﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر اﻷﺻﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"BGM‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﱪ اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﻏﺮف اﻟﺤﻔﻼت اﻟﻜﺒرية ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"2CH STEREO‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ وﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ أﻋﺪاد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬وإذا ﻛﺎن اﳌﺼﺪر اﻷﺻﲇ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد‬
‫اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﻘﻠﻠﻬﺎ إﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺗني‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻌﺎﻻً‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫‪50AR‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺗﺮددات اﻟﺠﻬري‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻬﺪوء‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻄﺎق اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك ﻟﺼﻮت ﻏري ﺣﻮاري‪ .‬وﺗﱪز‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﺪة ﻫﺬا اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﻓﻼم ﻟﻴ ًﻼ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.NIGHT‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "NIGHT ON‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮيت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ NIGHT‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪."MONO‬‬
‫• "‪ :"STEREO‬اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"MONO‬اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻷﺣﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﻟﱰدد‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﱰدد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،DISPLAY‬ﺗﺘﻐري ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪"12 87.50" ،‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﻹﻋﺪاد "‪"FM MODE‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪"STEREO" ،‬‬
‫‪49AR‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري رﻗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد رﻗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪PRESET‬‬
‫–‪) +/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(48‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻹﺟﺮاء ﺑﺪ ًءا ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻟﻠﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻄﺎق اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ورﻗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أوﻻً‬
‫)اﻧﻈﺮ »اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.((48‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪FM 10 : 88.00 MHz‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."FM‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."FM‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﲆ –‪ TUNING +/‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪأ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺢ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻟﻒ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪."MEMORY‬‬
‫أو ‪.c‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ PRESET +/‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪.VOLUME +/‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘامع ﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﱰددات‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ D.TUNING‬ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ ،2‬واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ أزرار‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﱰددات‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘامع ﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻏري ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﻴﺪوﻳﺔ أو اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﻴﺪوﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ TUNING +/‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﲆ ‪TUNING‬‬
‫–‪ .+/‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺪو ًﻳﺎ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫–‪ TUNING +/‬أو ‪.x‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "COMPLETE‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪48AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺮر اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬إﱃ ‪ 7‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫اﻷﺣﺎدي‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﻨﺎك ﺗﺄﺛري ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴني اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪."FM MODE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫أو ‪.c‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎص‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮن اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮن اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد دﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫ﻋﱪ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺼﺪر‬
‫"‪"DVD/CD‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫رادﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺤﻤﻮل اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ AUDIO IN‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫"‪"FM‬‬
‫"‪"USB‬‬
‫"‪"TV‬‬
‫"‪"AUDIO IN‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺰ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"DVD/CD‬أدﺧﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬
‫• "‪ :"FM‬ﺣﺪد ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(48‬‬
‫• "‪ :"USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﴍ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬
‫• "‪ :"TV‬ﺣﺪد ﻗﻨﺎة ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"AUDIO IN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻣﺤﻤﻮل‬
‫ﻋﱪ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﺳﻠﻚ اﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐري(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫‪47AR‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ‪ ID3‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 2.3/2.2‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪ ID3‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪1.1/1.0‬‬
‫واﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 2.3/2.2‬ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬وﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري اﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ "‪."NO TEXT‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺠﺎري ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﺪدًا ﻣﺤﺪودًا‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺣﺮف‪ .‬ﻋﻼو ًة ﻋﲆ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺟﻤﻴﻊ أﺣﺮف‬
‫اﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮة ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮانٍ ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DATA CD x‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪) DATA DVD/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪ 1‬وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 3‬رﻗﻢ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم واﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﻷول ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺺ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD/‬‬
‫‪ ،CD‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﺳﻢ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أو اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻢ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أو اﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR x‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ 1‬وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 2‬اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 3‬وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 4‬اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 5‬اﺳﻢ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬اﻟﻌﻨﻮان واﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫‪) VIDEO CD x‬ﻣﻊ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪Super VCD/(PBC‬‬
‫)ﻣﻊ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪(PBC‬‬
‫‪ 1‬وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺳﻢ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬رﻗﻢ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪) VIDEO CD x‬دون وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪CD/(PBC‬‬
‫‪ 1‬وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 2‬اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 3‬وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬اﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫‪ 6‬اﳌﺴﺎر واﻟﻔﻬﺮس*‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫*‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Super VCD x‬دون وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪(PBC‬‬
‫‪ 1‬وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﺺ اﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫‪ 3‬رﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر واﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬
‫‪/DATA DVD/DATA CD x‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت(‬
‫‪ 1‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ورﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﳌﻠﻒ(*‬
‫*‬
‫‪46AR‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم دﻋﻢ ‪ ID3‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪.2.3/2.2/1.1/1.0‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ‪ ID3‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 2.3/2.2‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪ ID3‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.1/1.0‬واﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 2.3/2.2‬ﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ MP3‬واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،ID3‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﺳﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.ID3‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﻃﻼع ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ *Exif‬ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫]‪ [DATE‬ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪DATA CD‬‬
‫(‪5‬‬
‫)‪8‬‬
‫)‪10( 15‬‬
‫‪18/9/2002‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬
‫* "‪ "Exchangeable Image File Format‬ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻜﺎﻣريات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪Japan‬‬
‫‪Electronics and Information Technology Industries‬‬
‫)‪.Association (JEITA‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫)‪(R‬‬
‫)‪(L‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﺤﻦ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ ‪2‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ ‪1‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ أي ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬وﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪(R‬‬
‫)‪(L‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮة ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﻃﻼع ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪AUDIO‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(38‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎرﻳﻮيك‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫] [ ﻛﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪192k MP3‬‬
‫‬
‫‪0: 13‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫ ‪,‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2‬‬
‫‪1: ENGLISH‬‬
‫‪ :2/0‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3/0‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻠﺤﻦ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3/1‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻠﺤﻦ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ وﺻﻮت‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3/2‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻠﺤﻦ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ وﺻﻮﺗني‬
‫دﻟﻴﻠﻴني‪.‬‬
‫‪Dvorak/Tchaikovsky/NedPho/Kreizberg‬‬
‫‪Adagio - Allegro molto‬‬
‫‪[T **:**:**/C **:**:**/D **:**:**] 1‬‬
‫وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻳﺸري "‪ "T‬إﱃ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎر‪ ،‬وﻳﺸري "‪ "C‬إﱃ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪،‬‬
‫وﻳﺸري "‪ "D‬إﱃ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]**‪[T-**:**:**/C-**:**:**/D-**:**:‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻳﺸري "‪ "T‬إﱃ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎر‪ ،‬وﻳﺸري "‪ "C‬إﱃ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪،‬‬
‫وﻳﺸري "‪ "D‬إﱃ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]**‪[**:**:‬‬
‫وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪/JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،ID3‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﺳﻢ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم‪/‬اﺳﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪.ID3‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم دﻋﻢ ‪ ID3‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪.2.3/2.2/1.1/1.0‬‬
‫‪45AR‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺼﺪر‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح إﱃ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح اﻷﺻﲇ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أو ﺗﻐري ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO x‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت اﳌﺼﺪر ﻏري اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‬
‫)‪(Karaoke Pon‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[1+2‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ ‪.1+2‬‬
‫]‪ :[1‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ ‪.1‬‬
‫]‪ :[2‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪VIDEO CD/CD x‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[L+R‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ اﻟﺴامﻋﺘني‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[STEREO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع مبﺼﺪر اﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا مل ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻳﻮيك‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻷﺻﻮات‪.‬‬
‫‪Super VCD x‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ KARAOKE PON‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء وﺿﻊ ‪Karaoke Pon‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ KARAOKE PON‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء وﺿﻊ ‪ Karaoke Pon‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻷﺻﻮات )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻷﺻﻮات(‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك أو إﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،VIDEO CD/CD‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‪،‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ اﻷﺻﻮات‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ أﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻷﺻﻮات‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪44AR‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[2:STEREO‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎرﻳﻮيك ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ Digital‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫•‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[1:L+R‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ اﻟﺴامﻋﺘني‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[1:STEREO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.1‬‬
‫]‪ :[2:L+R‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ اﻟﺴامﻋﺘني‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[VOCAL SELECT‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ ،Digital‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﻠﺤﻦ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ واﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﲇ‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓ ًﺔ إﱃ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺼﺎﺣﺐ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎر ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺐ أو ﻟﺤﻦ دﻟﻴﲇ أو ﺻﻮت دﻟﻴﲇ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻛﺒري وﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﺗﻮﴆ ‪ Sony‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪل ﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻋﲆ ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ أو أﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﻠﻒ‪ .‬إذا‬
‫ﻛﺎن ﻻ ﻳﺰال ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻠﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.MIC‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ – ‪ MIC VOL‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﻋﲆ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷدىن‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﻋﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻋﺪم ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﻋﲆ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷدىن‪.‬‬
‫– اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻏري اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك اﻷﺣﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪/CD/VIDEO CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (38‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ [1/L‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‬
‫اﻓﺼﻞ اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪ ،‬أو اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [KARAOKE MODE‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪.[OFF‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﺪى ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ECHO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،ECHO‬ﻳﺘﻐري ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﺪى‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫"‪"ECHO OFF" t "ECHO 1‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫"‪"ECHO 3" T "ECHO 2‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (34‬أو »ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) «USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﺪى اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد "‪."ECHO OFF‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ ﰲ اﻟﻐﻨﺎء ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ MIC VOL +/‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪوث ﻧﺒﺎح ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪:‬‬
‫– ﺣﺮك اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺑﻌﻴﺪًا ﻋﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫– اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن أو ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﺪى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫– اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك دون ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﻔﺘﺎح أﻏﻨﻴﺔ )اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﻔﺘﺎح(‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم إدﺧﺎل أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ USB‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[KARAOKE MODE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[ON‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻚ اﻟﺼﻮيت ﻣﺎ مل ﻳﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ KEYCON #/2‬ﳌﻼءﻣﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻚ اﻟﺼﻮيت ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى أﻗﻞ أو أﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬
‫‪ 13‬درﺟﺔ )‪.(#6 – 26‬‬
‫‪43AR‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[EFFECT‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MODE 1‬ﻳﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ أﻋﲆ‬
‫إﱃ أﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MODE 2‬ﻳﺘﻤﺪد ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺎر‬
‫إﱃ ميني ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MODE 3‬ﻳﺘﻤﺪد ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ وﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MODE 4‬ﺗﺘﺒﺪل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮايئ ﺑني اﳌﺆﺛﺮات‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MODE 5‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﻮق‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬وﻗﺘًﺎ أﻃﻮل ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﺤﺪد‪ ،‬وﺑﺨﺎﺻ ًﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ذات اﻟﺪﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ 3,000,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ أو أﻛرث‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪ [INTERVAL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬أو ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [MEDIA‬ﻋﲆ إﻋﺪاد ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮت‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪ [RESOLUTION‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]) × ‪1920‬‬
‫‪ [1080i) HD‬أو ]‪) [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬أو ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [MEDIA‬ﻋﲆ إﻋﺪاد ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪة ﻋﺮض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫]‪ [INTERVAL‬ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[NORMAL‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮر ﻋﺮض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺪة‬
‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[FAST‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺪة ﻋﲆ وﻗﺖ أﻗﴫ ﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪.[NORMAL‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[SLOW 1‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺪة ﻋﲆ وﻗﺖ أﻃﻮل ﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪.[NORMAL‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[SLOW 2‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺪة ﻋﲆ وﻗﺖ أﻃﻮل ﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪.[SLOW 1‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪًا ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ارﺟﻊ إﱃ اﻹرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ أو اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ أو‬
‫ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫]‪ ،[INTERVAL‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[MEDIA‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﱃ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة‬
‫‪ .5‬وﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎر آﺧﺮ ﻏري ]‪،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪.MENU‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ DVD MENU‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪42AR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.N‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر(‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ(‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[SHUFFLE‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺤﺪدة ﰲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DATA CD x‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻘﻂ(‪DATA DVD/‬‬
‫)ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻘﻂ(‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• ])‪ :[ON (MUSIC‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ أي ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ أول ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[DISC‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[TITLE‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[CHAPTER‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪VIDEO CD/CD x‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[DISC‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪/DATA DVD/DATA CD x‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [DISC‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [MEMORY‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [TRACK‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار‬
‫اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [FILE‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،CLEAR‬أو ﺣﺪد ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻴﺰة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ ﻣﻊ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ CD‬أو ‪ Super VCD‬ذات ﻋﺮض ‪.PBC‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﻜﺮاره‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR x‬‬
‫‪VIDEO CD/CD x‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[REPEAT‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫‪.MP3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،CLEAR‬أو ﺣﺪد ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻴﺰة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ﻣﻊ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ CD‬أو ‪ Super VCD‬ذات ﻋﺮض ‪.PBC‬‬
‫‪41AR‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪد اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺎر ‪ 2‬ﻛﺄول ﻣﺴﺎر ﻣﱪﻣﺞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [02‬أﺳﻔﻞ ]‪ ،[T‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﱪﻣﺞ‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪[T‬‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ(‬
‫‪0: 03:51‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼل ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎص‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 99‬ﻣﺴﺎ ًرا‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫––‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[PROGRAM‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[SET t‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫‪PROGRAM‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬
‫‪1. TRACK‬‬
‫‪2. TRACK‬‬
‫‪3. TRACK‬‬
‫‪4. TRACK‬‬
‫‪5. TRACK‬‬
‫‪6. TRACK‬‬
‫‪7. TRACK‬‬
‫إﺟامﱄ وﻗﺖ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﱪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻟﱪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎرات أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻛﺮر اﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗني ‪ 4‬و‪.5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫إﺟامﱄ وﻗﺖ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﱪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫‪0: 00:00‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫––‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪PROGRAM‬‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬
‫‪1. TRACK‬‬
‫‪2. TRACK‬‬
‫‪3. TRACK‬‬
‫‪4. TRACK‬‬
‫‪5. TRACK‬‬
‫‪6. TRACK‬‬
‫‪7. TRACK‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.c‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﺮك اﳌﺆﴍ إﱃ ﺻﻒ اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪) [T‬ﻳﻜﻮن ﰲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ]‪.([01‬‬
‫‪0: 00:00‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫––‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم ﻋﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﱪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬أو ﺣﺪد ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ]‪ [ON‬ﰲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ 3‬واﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ أو إﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫––‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ 5‬ﰲ »اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﱪﻣﺞ« ﻟﻠﱪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ]‪ [--‬أﺳﻔﻞ ]‪ ،[T‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﰲ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪40AR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴريه أو إﻟﻐﺎؤه‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬف اﳌﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.CLEAR‬‬
‫‪PROGRAM‬‬
‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬
‫‪1. TRACK‬‬
‫‪2. TRACK‬‬
‫‪3. TRACK‬‬
‫‪4. TRACK‬‬
‫‪5. TRACK‬‬
‫‪6. TRACK‬‬
‫‪7. TRACK‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 3‬ﰲ »اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﱪﻣﺞ«‪.‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 3‬ﰲ »اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﱪﻣﺞ«‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X‬وﺣﺪد ]‪ ،[ALL CLEAR‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪) DATA CD/CD/VIDEO CD x‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪DATA/(MP3‬‬
‫‪) DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪/(MP3‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮت(‬
‫‪Super VCD x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[1:STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.1‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[1:1/L‬ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪى ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ‪) 1‬أﺣﺎدي(‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[1:2/R‬ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ‪) 1‬أﺣﺎدي(‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[2:STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.2‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[2:1/L‬ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪى ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ‪) 2‬أﺣﺎدي(‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[2:2/R‬ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ‪) 2‬أﺣﺎدي(‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [MENU‬أو ]‪TOP‬‬
‫‪ ،[MENU‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮان أﺻﲇ أو ﻋﻨﻮان ُﻣﻌﺪّل ﻋﲆ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-VR‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[1/L‬ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪى )أﺣﺎدي(‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[2/R‬ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )أﺣﺎدي(‪.‬‬
‫‪) DATA CD x‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) DATA DVD/(Xvid‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪/(Xvid‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪(Xvid‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻋﺪة ﻣﺴﺎرات ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪،[DISC MENU‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD-VR‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ ،[PLAY LIST‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[PLAY LIST‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ORIGINAL‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﰲ اﻷﺳﺎس‪.‬‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪ORIGINAL/‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪DVD TOP‬‬
‫‪.MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﱰﺟامت وﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬه اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DVD TOP MENU‬أو ‪.DVD MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/X/x/c‬أو أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ أو ﺗﻐﻴريه‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪39AR‬‬
‫]‪[CHAPTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ])**( **[ )ﺗﺸري ** إﱃ رﻗﻢ ﻣﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸري اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد داﺧﻞ اﻷﻗﻮاس إﱃ إﺟامﱄ ﻋﺪد‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ أو اﻟﻔﺼﻮل أو اﳌﺴﺎرات أو اﻟﻔﻬﺎرس أو اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫أو اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪.‬‬
‫) ‪98 ( 9 9‬‬
‫) ‪13 ( 9 9‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪0: 03: 17‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري اﻟﺰواﻳﺎ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ANGLE‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﱰﺟامت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SUBTITLE‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [MEDIA‬ﻋﲆ ]‪[MUSIC/PHOTO‬‬
‫]‪ ،[FILE‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫وﻋﺪم ﻇﻬﻮر‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬أو أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﳌﺴﺎر أو اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫)‪98( 99‬‬
‫)‪13( 99‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪0: 03: 17‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ AUDIO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ أو ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﳌﺼﺪر ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻋﺪة ﺻﻴﻎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت أو ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸري إﱃ ﻛﻮد اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬اﻧﻈﺮ »ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫أﻛﻮاد اﻟﻠﻐﺎت« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (78‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ميﺜﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﺮﺗني أو أﻛرث‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮن أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻟﻠﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪5.1‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪوث ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﱰدد‬
‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪(LFE‬‬
‫إﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻳﺴﺎر‪/‬ميني(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻜﻮد اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 .1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪LS‬‬
‫أﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﻳﺴﺎر‪/‬ميني(‬
‫‪ +‬وﺳﻂ‬
‫]‪ ،[TIME‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﻮد اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻹﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘني و‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫و‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪0 ،2 ،0 ،1 ،2‬‬
‫)]‪.([2:10:20‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻟﻜﻮد اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪38AR‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪LFE‬‬
‫‪RS‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪1: ENGLISH‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺠﺎري ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪DVD-VR x‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻋﺪة ﻣﺴﺎرات ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎم ﺑـ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻃﺎر واﺣﺪ ﰲ‬
‫اﳌﺮة )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة(‬
‫‪ ،X‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪STEP‬‬
‫‪. STEP‬‬
‫• ‪STEP‬‬
‫أزرار ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎم ﺑـ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي أو اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫أو اﳌﻠﻒ أو اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪.x‬‬
‫‪.X‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﴎﻳ ًﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة إﻃﺎر ﺑﺈﻃﺎر‬
‫‪.N‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪STEP‬‬
‫‪ :‬اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﻹﻃﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫أو‬
‫‪ 10 :‬ﺛﻮانٍ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 30 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎم‪.‬‬
‫أو ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ أو ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ أو اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﺪة‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ X/x‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻣﺮﺗني‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬أو >‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :.‬اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺗني ﺧﻼل ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫واﺣﺪة ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• >‪ :‬اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬أو ‪ c‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :C‬اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :c‬اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ /m‬أو ‪ M/‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : /m‬وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع ﻟﻠﱰﺟﻴﻊ‬
‫اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :M/‬وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ /m‬أو ‪ M/‬أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐري ﴎﻋﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،X‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ /m‬أو‬
‫‪.M/‬‬
‫• ‪ : /m‬ﻋﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫)ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :M/‬ﻋﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫)ﻟﻸﻣﺎم(‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ /m‬أو ‪ M/‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐري ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﻹﻃﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬اﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أو‬
‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ مبﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ > )‪ c‬ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ (JPEG‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻷﺧري ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ C) .‬ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ .(JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪ [RESOLUTION‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ])× ‪1920‬‬
‫‪ [1080i) HD‬أو ]‪) [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎر‪/‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌني أو‬
‫ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎر‪/‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪/‬اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‪/‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫]‪[TITLE/SCENE/TRACK‬‬
‫]‪[CHAPTER/INDEX‬‬
‫]‪[TRACK‬‬
‫]‪[FOLDER‬‬
‫]‪[FILE‬‬
‫‪37AR‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/X/x/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أو اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ ﺑﺪاﻳ ًﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﺼﻐﺮة ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.PICTURE NAVI‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.DVD MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪،[BROWSING‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER LIST‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [PICTURE LIST‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺻﻮر ﻣﺼﻐﺮة ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪36AR‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺮاد ﻣﻨﺤﻪ أوﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ JPEG‬أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[MEDIA‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [MUSIC/PHOTO‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/‬‬
‫‪ DATA DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬وﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻛﻌﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MUSIC‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[VIDEO‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[PHOTO‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‪ .JPEG‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻛﻌﺮض‬
‫ﴍاﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل أوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪ ،[MEDIA‬اﻧﻈﺮ »أوﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻧﻮاع‬
‫اﳌﻠﻔﺎت« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(77‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻊ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺪرج ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪/‬إﻏﻼق درج‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪر ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.MEMORY SELECT‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫)‪.(USB‬‬
‫‪Home Theatre System‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪USB Memory 2 selected.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪[Operation not possible.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻐري رﻗﻢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻷﻣﺮ ﺣﻮاﱄ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮانٍ ﻗﺒﻞ أن ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫"‪ "READING‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [FOLDER LIST‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ ،[FOLDER LIST‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻹزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ x‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ [/1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌني‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬
‫)‪Let's Talk About Love (1985‬‬
‫)‪1st Album (1986‬‬
‫)‪In the Middle of Nowhere (1986‬‬
‫)‪Ready for Romance (1986‬‬
‫)‪In the Garden of Venus (1987‬‬
‫)‪Romantic Warriors (1987‬‬
‫)‪Back for Good (1988‬‬
‫)‪Alone (1999‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أو اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ VOLUME +/‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ﻣﺠﻠﺪًا ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) «USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪O‬‬
‫‪.RETURN‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أو اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪TRACK LIST‬‬
‫‪03 In the Middle of Nowher...‬‬
‫‪01_Geronimo_s_Cadillac‬‬
‫‪02_Riding_On_A_White_Swan‬‬
‫‪03_Give_Me_Peace_On_Earth‬‬
‫‪04_Sweet_Little_Shella‬‬
‫‪05_Ten_Thousand_Lonely_Drums‬‬
‫‪06_Lonely_Tears_In_Chinatown‬‬
‫‪07_In_Shaire‬‬
‫‪35AR‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ VOLUME +/‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪"/1‬‬
‫‪FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪MEMORY‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫–‪VOLUME +/‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪PICTURE‬‬
‫‪NAVI‬‬
‫‪DVD MENU‬‬
‫‪C/X/x/c,‬‬
‫–‪VOLUME +/‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺪرج‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.Z‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﲆ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪34AR‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ N‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺼﺪر‬
‫اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"DVD/CD‬ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"USB‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪FULL‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ﻧﻮع‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪.VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-‬‬
‫‪ DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫)‪ ،[(COMPONENT OUT‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪FULL‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫]‪ ،[SETUP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫‪CUSTOM‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أو‪،‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻋﱪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺨﻼف اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪.COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻳﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬و‪،‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻋﱪ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪.COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[ON‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CUSTOM‬‬
‫‪CUSTOM‬‬
‫‪QUICK‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﳌﺪة ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮانٍ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[VIDEO SETUP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪FULL‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[START‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ C/c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[YES‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[NO‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪33AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[HDMI SETUP‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ وﺻﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(26‬ﺣﺪد ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫)‪AUTO(1920x1080p‬‬
‫‪HDMI RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫‪CONTROL FOR HDMI:‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL:‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪YCBCR‬‬
‫‪YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪AUDIO(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪JPEG RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺣﺪد ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪،[HDMI RESOLUTION‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫)‪AUTO(1920x1080p‬‬
‫‪HDMI RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫‪CONTROL FOR HDMI:‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL:‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪YCBCR‬‬
‫‪YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪AUDIO(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪JPEG RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪ ،[SETUP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪CUSTOM‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪CUSTOM‬‬
‫‪CUSTOM‬‬
‫‪QUICK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫)‪AUTO(1920x1080p‬‬
‫‪HDMI RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫)‪CONTROL FOR HDMI: AUTO(1920x1080p‬‬
‫‪LEVEL2‬‬
‫‪AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL: 1920x1080i‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪1280x720p‬‬
‫‪YCBCR‬‬
‫‪YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪720x480p‬‬
‫‪AUDIO(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪JPEG RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫])‪ :[AUTO (1920 × 1080p‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫إﺷﺎرة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[1920 × 1080i‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.*1080i × 1920‬‬
‫]‪ :[1280 × 720p‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.*720p × 1280‬‬
‫]‪ :**[720 × 480p‬ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.*480p × 720‬‬
‫* ‪ :i‬ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ :p ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫** ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ ،[720 × 480/576p‬وﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﻨﻈﺎم إﺷﺎرات ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.576p × 720‬‬
‫‪32AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ :3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ واﳌﻮدﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪"/1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ENGLISH‬‬
‫‪ENGLISH‬‬
‫‪FRENCH‬‬
‫‪SPANISH‬‬
‫‪PORTUGUESE‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬
‫‪OSD:‬‬
‫‪MENU:‬‬
‫‪AUDIO:‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE (COMPONENT OUT):‬‬
‫‪4:3 LETTER BOX‬‬
‫‪4:3 OUTPUT:‬‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫‪PAN‬‬
‫‪SCAN‬‬
‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬
‫‪C/X/x/c,‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[16:9‬إن ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض إﱃ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻫﺬه ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ذات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ أو أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ذات ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض إﱃ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 4:3‬اﳌﺰودة‬
‫ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬
‫• ]‪ [4:3 LETTER BOX‬أو ]‪:[4:3 PAN SCAN‬‬
‫إن ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض إﱃ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻫﺬه ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ذات ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض إﱃ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪4:3‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪد اﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫اﻟﻮاردة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ "/1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫دون إدﺧﺎل أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أو ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪HDMI SETUP‬‬
‫)‪AUTO(1920x1080p‬‬
‫‪HDMI RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪CONTROL FOR HDMI:‬‬
‫‪AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL:‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪YCOFF‬‬
‫‪BCR‬‬
‫‪AUDIO(HDMI):‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪JPEG RESOLUTION:‬‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫‪Home Theatre System‬‬
‫‪to run QUICK SETUP.‬‬
‫‪to erase this message.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ X/x‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪،HDMI‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Press‬‬
‫‪Press‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬ﰲ أﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮة‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫• إذا مل ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ."DVD/CD‬وإذا مل ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ اﻵن‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﱃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick‬‬
‫‪) Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(58‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪IAL‬‬
‫‪COAX‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ANTENN‬‬
‫أو‬
‫اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻟﺴﻠيك ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻟﺴﻠيك ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ ،FM‬اﻓﺮده وﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ أﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎن‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ "/1‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ "/1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺠﺪاري‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺠﺪاري ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪"/1‬‬
‫‪30AR‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان )‪ PAL‬أو ‪) (NTSC‬ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت إﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ وآﺳﻴﺎ واﻟﻬﻨﺪ واﻟﴩق اﻷوﺳﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ PAL‬أو ‪ NTSC‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان‪.‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺒﺪيئ ﳌﻮدﻳﻼت إﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ واﻟﻬﻨﺪ واﻟﴩق اﻷوﺳﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪.PAL‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺒﺪيئ ﳌﻮدﻳﻼت آﺳﻴﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪."/1‬‬
‫أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ "/1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ FUNCTION‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻘﻮم ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬه اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐري ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان ﺑني ‪ PAL‬و‪.NTSC‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "PAL‬أو "‪ "NTSC‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺳامﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ مبﺎ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻣﺤﻤﻮل )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪ A‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺳﻠﻚ اﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐري )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪ B‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ًة‪ ،‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) USB‬ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫"‬
‫إﱃ ﻣﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻣﺤﻤﻮل‬
‫‪29AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘامع إﱃ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﻋﱪ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد إﺣﺪى ﻃﺮق اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ :1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻫﺬه ﻫﻲ اﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ إﺷﺎرة ﺻﻮت ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﴫي )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( )‪ DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴني ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻘﺎرﻧ ًﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪AL OU‬‬
‫‪DIGIT‬‬
‫‪CAL‬‬
‫‪OPTI‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪DIGITA‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫)ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪AL‬‬
‫‪OPTIC‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫)ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ (DIGITAL IN OPTICAL) TV‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮاز ‪ DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻗﺒﻮل ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ واﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬وﺗﻜﻮن اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻧﻘﻄﺎع اﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮانٍ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﺻﺪور ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ دﺧﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮي ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﻮيت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،1‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮي( واﺗﺼﺎل ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [AUDIO RETURN CHANNEL‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [Off‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(62‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫»اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز« )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮن آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أو ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎيئ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أو ‪ ،PlayStation‬ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ TV‬ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪28AR‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪NENT‬‬
‫‪R/CR‬‬
‫‪COMPO PB/CB P‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪O OUT‬‬
‫‪T VIDE‬‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪ONEN‬‬
‫‪COMP‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪ARC‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪3‬‬
‫)ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪*2‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓري ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮز ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪/‬ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪27AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎز وﺟﻬﺎز اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺻﻮت ‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت ‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد إﺣﺪى ﻃﺮق اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ :1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻫﺬه ﻫﻲ اﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪*HDMI‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴني ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻘﺎرﻧ ًﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪.1‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،Audio Return Channel‬ﻓﺴﱰﺳﻞ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ إﺷﺎرة ﺻﻮت رﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬وﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ إﺟﺮاء وﺻﻠﺔ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘامع إﱃ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،Audio Return Channel‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫»اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬
‫‪ x‬اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ :3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( )‪ DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴني ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻘﺎرﻧ ًﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪26AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ذي اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮف ‪ ،3‬وﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ دون اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮف ‪.#‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ مبﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪(+‬‬
‫اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮن‬
‫)–(‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺎزل ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ )اﻟﻐﻼف اﳌﻄﺎﻃﻲ( ﰲ أﻃﺮاف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻼت أﺳﻼك اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻮن اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ SPEAKERS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻳﺪل ﻋﲆ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫)اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى )‪((L‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪DIGITA‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪OPTIC‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪TL‬‬
‫‪FRON‬‬
‫‪TR‬‬
‫‪FRON‬‬
‫‪ER‬‬
‫‪NT‬‬
‫‪R CE‬‬
‫‪RS‬‬
‫‪SPEAKE‬‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫)اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪((R‬‬
‫‪OOFE‬‬
‫‪SUBW‬‬
‫‪SUR L‬‬
‫‪RS‬‬
‫‪SUR R‬‬
‫‪SPEAKE‬‬
‫أﺧﴬ‬
‫)اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﻧﻔﲇ‬
‫)ﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‬
‫رﻣﺎدي‬
‫)ﺳامﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪((R‬‬
‫أزرق‬
‫)ﺳامﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى )‪((L‬‬
‫‪25AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﺑﺴﻨﺎد اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ اﻟﱪﻏﻲ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮل ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ اﳌﻘﺒﺾ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺴﻔﲇ )‪ ،(1‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي )‪.(2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎف ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﺠﺪار ﺳﻤﻴﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ أو اﻟﱪﻏﻲ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﺑﺴﻨﺎد اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻘﻂ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ وﺗﺴﺒﺐ إﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪24AR‬‬
‫ﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﺪار ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﺰاء اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار‬
‫)ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ DAV-DZ340K‬اﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺮر ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪار ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮاق‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم أﺳﻼك اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫• اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى )‪ :(L‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫• اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺎد اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬وﻣﺮر ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺎد اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ وأﺧﺮﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺎد‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮن‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى )‪ :(L‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺎد اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪23AR‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺰ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ‪ .‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻷﺷﻜﺎل أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ارﺑﻂ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪار‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻖ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ اﻟﱪﻏﻲ اﳌﺮﺑﻮط‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻢ إﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ 145‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ )‪DAV-DZ640K/‬‬
‫‪ DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ 400‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﺼﻐرية )‪DAV-DZ340K/‬‬
‫‪ DAV-DZ640K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪22AR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﺪار‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار‬
‫)‪ DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺰع أوراق اﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺘﻲ اﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﻣﺰدوج اﻟﺠﻮاﻧﺐ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫أوراق اﻟﺤامﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ مبﺤﺎذاﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻔﺠﻮة اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻞ ‪) DAV-DZ340K‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ًة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮدي‪ :‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﺪار ﺑﺰاوﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﺰاء اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪ :‬اﻧﻈﺮ »ﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﺪار ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﺰاء اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(23‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ذي اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮف ‪ ،3‬وﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ دون اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮف ‪.#‬‬
‫اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮن‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى )‪ :(L‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ :‬أﺧﴬ‬
‫ﺳامﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى )‪ :(L‬أزرق‬
‫ﺳامﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬رﻣﺎدي‬
‫‪21AR‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• اﺗﺼﻞ مبﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ أو ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ مبﻮاد اﻟﺠﺪار أو اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳌﺎدة اﻟﺠﺪار وﻗﻮﺗﻪ‪ .‬مبﺎ أن اﻟﺠﺪار اﳌﺒﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎدة اﻟﺠﺺ ﻫﺶ ﺟﺪًا‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم ﻋﲆ ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﺪار ﻗﺎﺋﻢ وﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﰲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﳌﻘﻮاة‪.‬‬
‫• إن ‪ Sony‬ﻏري ﻣﺴﺆوﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺤﻮادث أو اﻟﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻏري اﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ أو ﻗﻮة اﻟﺠﺪار ﻏري اﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ أو اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻏري اﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﱪﻏﻲ أو‬
‫اﻟﻜﻮارث اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ :1‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪ A‬اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪) L‬اﻟﻴﴪى((‬
‫‪ B‬اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪) R‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ((‬
‫‪ C‬اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ D‬ﺳامﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )‪) L‬اﻟﻴﴪى((‬
‫‪ E‬ﺳامﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )‪) R‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ((‬
‫‪ F‬ﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ G‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫"‬
‫'‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫(‬
‫&‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺸﻴﺎت ﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻق مبﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫اﻧﺰع اﻟﺤﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻق‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء اﻟﻮاﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮخ اﻟﺤﺬر ﻋﻨﺪ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت و‪/‬أو ﺣﻮاﻣﻞ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ أرﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎص )ﻣﻄﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻤﻊ أو اﻟﺰﻳﺖ أو‬
‫ﻣﺼﻘﻮﻟﺔ أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻊ أو ﺗﻐري ﻟﻠﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫)‪ DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ »دﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت« اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪20AR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ أي ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ]‪[PROGRAM]) [OFF‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫• ﻳﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫و]‪ [SHUFFLE‬و]‪ [REPEAT‬و]‪ [A/V SYNC‬و]‪ [KARAOKE MODE‬و]‪ [VOCAL SELECT‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ .‬ﻳﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ‬
‫]‪ [ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [PLAY LIST‬اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ(‪.‬‬
‫‪19AR‬‬
‫]‪) [REPEAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر أو ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎر‪/‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ واﺣﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫]‪) [A/V SYNC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﺑني اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫]‪) [DISC MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫]‪) [BROWSING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(35‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ ‬
‫]‪) [SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(59‬‬
‫]‪[CUSTOM‬‬
‫ﻋﻼو ًة ﻋﲆ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،Quick Setup‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [QUICK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(31‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [FOLDER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(37‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣريا رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪة ﻋﺮض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﳌﺮاد اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫]‪) [FILE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(37‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫]‪) [DATE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫]‪) [INTERVAL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(42‬‬
‫]‪) [EFFECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(42‬‬
‫]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ أوﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻔﺎت )ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ ،MP3/(2AAC/(2WMA‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬أو ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ ((3JPEG‬اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA/DATA CD‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫‪/DVD‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫]‪) [USB TRANSFER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪DATA CD/‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫‪ DATA DVD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪(1‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻫﺬه اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪/DATA DVD/DATA CD‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪(2‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪(3‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺼﺪر ذو اﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫]‪) [KARAOKE MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫]‪) [VOCAL SELECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺻﻮات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪18AR‬‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺠﺎري ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺠﺎري ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪ N‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪،‬‬
‫‪ x‬إﻳﻘﺎف‪ ،‬وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻦ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺠﺎري‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫إﺟامﱄ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
‫إﺟامﱄ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻔﺼﻮل‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)‪98( 99‬‬
‫)‪13( 99‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪0: 04: 17‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪DISC‬‬
‫‪TITLE‬‬
‫‪CHAPTER‬‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬
‫اﺳﻢ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪Quit:‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺘﺎ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ 1‬و‪ 2‬ﺑﻨﻮدًا ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺼﺪر‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت ﺑني اﻷﻗﻮاس ﰲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺼﺪر ذو اﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫]‪) [TITLE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) [SCENE]/(37‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) [TRACK]/(37‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(37‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو اﳌﺸﻬﺪ أو اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫]‪) [CHAPTER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) [INDEX]/(37‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(37‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﻟﻔﻬﺮس اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [TRACK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(37‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD-RW/DVD-R‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )]‪ [ORIGINAL‬أو‬
‫]‪.([PLAYLIST‬‬
‫]‪) [TIME‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(38‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﻃﻼع ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻨﻘﴤ ووﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻛﻮد اﻟﻮﻗﺖ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت )‪ DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫]‪) [PROGRAM‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [SHUFFLE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫ ‬
‫‪17AR‬‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ إﱃ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ وﻋﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ذات اﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ "DVD/CD‬أو "‪."USB‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،DISPLAY‬ﺗﺘﻐري ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪... T 1 T 3 T 2 T 1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪) 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‬
‫‪ 3‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪16AR‬‬
‫ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‬
‫أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺘني ﻧﻮع ‪) R6‬ﻣﻘﺎس ‪) (AA‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺘني( مبﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻓني ‪ 3‬و‪ #‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺘني ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﱰك وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺳﺎﺧﻦ أو رﻃﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻊ أﺧﺮى ﻗﺪميﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ أي ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﰲ إﻃﺎر وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬وﺑﺨﺎﺻ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮي ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﱰة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﺘﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﴪﻳﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت أو ﺻﺪأﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪15AR‬‬
‫‪) MEMORY SELECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(53 ،34‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ ذاﻛﺮة ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) SOUND MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪) DYNAMIC BASS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺗﺮددات اﻟﺠﻬري‪.‬‬
‫‪) NIGHT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻠﻴﲇ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PICTURE NAVI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(35‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ اﻟﺼﻮر ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪) SYSTEM MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(58 ،56 ،48‬‬
‫‪C/X/x/c‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ إﱃ أﺣﺪ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل إﱃ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪) RETURN O‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(35‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DISPLAY‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪،43 ،40 ،37 ،34 ،31 ،16‬‬
‫‪(59 ،53 ،51‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل إﱃ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل إﱃ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪MUTING E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫–‪) VOLUME +/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(34‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫أزرار ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ »ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮى« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(37‬‬
‫>‪) ./‬اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ(‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪STEP‬‬
‫‪REPLAY/ADVANCE‬‬
‫‪) m/M‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﴎﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﴎﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪SLOW‬‬
‫‪) H‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) X‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪) x‬إﻳﻘﺎف(‬
‫أزرار ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ »اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻟﻠﺮادﻳﻮ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(48‬‬
‫–‪PRESET +/‬‬
‫–‪TUNING +/‬‬
‫–‪PROG +/‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪TV G‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ إﱃ وﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪14AR‬‬
‫‪) DVD TOP MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ أو إﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪ DVD‬أو إﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(48 ،37‬‬
‫ﻹدﺧﺎل أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪/‬اﻟﻔﺼﻮل وﺗﺮددات اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ وﻣﺎ‬
‫إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CLEAR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(55 ،40 ،37‬‬
‫ﳌﺴﺢ ﺣﻘﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎة أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪.10‬‬
‫وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ONE-TOUCH‬‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪) THEATRE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺜﺎﱄ ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﻓﻼم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ONE-TOUCH PLAY‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪) TV &/1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أو ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪) &/1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(31‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أو ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪) SLEEP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫‪THEATRE‬‬
‫‪BRAVIA Sync‬‬
‫‪SLEEP MIC VOL KEYCON FUNCTION‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪ECHO‬‬
‫‪KARAOKE PON‬‬
‫‪AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪D.TUNING MEMORY‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪SOUND‬‬
‫‪MODE‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫‪DYNAMIC‬‬
‫‪BASS‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‪.‬‬
‫‪) ECHO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﺪى‪.‬‬
‫–‪) MIC VOL +/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪) KEYCON #/2‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻣﻔﺘﺎح إﺣﺪى اﻷﻏﺎين‪.‬‬
‫‪) FUNCTION‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(48 ،47 ،34‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) KARAOKE PON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪.Karaoke Pon‬‬
‫‬
‫‪NIGHT‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM PICTURE‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪NAVI‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪MENU MUTING‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪TOP MENU‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪VOLUME‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪PROG‬‬
‫‪STEP‬‬
‫‪REPLAY ADVANCE PRESET‬‬
‫‪PROG‬‬
‫‪PRESET‬‬
‫‪TUNING‬‬
‫‪SLOW‬‬
‫‪TUNING‬‬
‫‪SLOW‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ أزرار اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 5‬و ‪ VOLUME +‬و‪ H‬ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﳌﻠﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺗﻠﻔﺎز ‪ Sony‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻷزرار اﳌﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺎز ‪Sony‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻷزرار اﳌﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪.TV 7‬‬
‫‪ THEATRE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷزرار ‪ 1‬و‪TV "/1 1‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ًة دون اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪.TV 7‬‬
‫‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(38‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪/‬اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮيت‪.‬‬
‫‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(38‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﺟامت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪) ANGLE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(38‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ إﱃ زواﻳﺎ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﺧﺮى ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪة‬
‫زواﻳﺎ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪) DISPLAY‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر دﺧﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪) D.TUNING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮددات اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ أو اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷزرار‪.‬‬
‫‪13AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
COAXIAL 75
FM
R
AUDIO IN
ANTENNA
L
TV
DIGITAL
IN
ARC
SUR R
SUR L
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT R
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
TV
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‫ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬E
DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/)
(26 ‫ ﻓﻘﻂ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DAV-DZ940K
(26 ‫ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬VIDEO OUT ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
(26 ‫ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬HDMI OUT ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
F
G
Y
OPTICAL
OUT
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT
(25 ‫ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬SPEAKERS ‫اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
(DIGITAL IN OPTICAL) TV ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
(‫ ﻓﻘﻂ‬DAV-DZ840K/DAV-DZ940K)
(26 ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
(26 ‫( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬AUDIO IN R/L) TV ‫اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
(COAXIAL 75 FM) ANTENNA ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
(30 ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
A
B
C
D
12AR
‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻷﺟﺰاء وﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑني اﻷﻗﻮاس‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪REC TO USB‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬وﺟﻪ وﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺠﺎه ﻫﺬا اﳌﻜﺎن ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﴤء أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪VOLUME‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪) REC TO USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء أﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ )‪) (USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(34 ،29‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(29‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪FUNCTION J‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪) MIC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫أزرار ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬إﻏﻼق(‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ درج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أو إﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) N‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو ﻹﻋﺎدﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) x‬إﻳﻘﺎف(‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف(‪.‬‬
‫>‪) ./‬اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ إﱃ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﳌﺴﺎر أو اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪) "/1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬أو ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪11AR‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬
‫• وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ)‪(1‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎرات ﻧﻮع ‪) R6‬ﻣﻘﺎس‪(2) (AA‬‬
‫• اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻟﺴﻠيك ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(1) FM‬‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(1‬‬
‫*‬
‫أو‬
‫• أﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮاز‪DAV-DZ840K/‬‬
‫‪(2) DAV-DZ940K‬‬
‫‪10AR‬‬
‫• ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ* )‪(1‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬
‫• دﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫)‪DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K/‬‬
‫‪ DAV- DZ940K‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓري ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻃﺮز ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪/‬ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻌﺒﻮة‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‬
‫• ‪DAV-DZ340K‬‬
‫• ‪DAV-DZ840K‬‬
‫• ‪DAV-DZ640K‬‬
‫• ‪DAV-DZ940K‬‬
‫• أﺳﻼك اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة(‬
‫)أﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬أﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬أﺧﴬ‪/‬رﻣﺎدي‪/‬أزرق(‬
‫• ﺣﺸﻴﺎت ﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻق )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة(‬
‫• أﺟﺰاء اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻞ ‪) DAV-DZ340K‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫• أﺟﺰاء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺪاﺋﺮي اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-DZ640K/DAV-DZ840K‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫• أﺟﺰاء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-DZ840K‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫• أﺟﺰاء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-DZ940K‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(12‬‬
‫‪9AR‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪/DATA DVD/DATA CD‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺷﺠﺮي ُﻣﻌﻘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ آﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪/DATA CD‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪/DATA DVD‬أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ﻛﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺿامن اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔري‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪ MP3/WMA/AAC‬وأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ووﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺿامن اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔري‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ MPEG4‬وأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ووﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻼمئًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬أو إذا‬
‫ﻛﺎن ﻫﻨﺎك أﻛرث ﻣﻦ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ أو أﻛرث ﻣﻦ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل أﺟﻬﺰة ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أﺟﻬﺰة )‪.Mass Storage Class (MSC‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ أن ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ أﺟﻬﺰة أو ذاﻛﺮات ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﻏﻢ وﺟﻮد ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻌﻘﺪة ﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻘﺘﴫ اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة ‪USB‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ واﻟﺼﻮر واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻘﺮأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬وﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات واﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻷﻣﺮ وﻗﺘًﺎ ﻃﻮﻳ ًﻼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮاءة ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻮزع ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﻨﺎك ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺣﺮص دامئًﺎ ﻋﲆ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻗﺒﻞ إزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆدي إزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز إﱃ إﺗﻼف اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓريوﺳﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪8AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎت‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ اﻷوﱃ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ .MP3‬ﻛام ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ اﻷوﱃ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮرة ‪ .JPEG‬ﻛام ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬وﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ CD‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ أو ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ اﻷوﱃ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ اﻷوﱃ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻛﻮد ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋًﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬وﺳﻴﻘﻮم اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﻛﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮم ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD VIDEO‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪. ALL‬‬
‫إذا ﺣﺎوﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻳﺔ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD VIDEO‬أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪[Playback prohibited by area limitations.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ .‬وﺣﺴﺐ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ أي ﻣﺆﴍ ﻟﻜﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎن ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO‬ﻣﺤﻈﻮ ًرا ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻴﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬أو ‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬أو ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻋﻦ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‪ .‬وﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬أو ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺻﻤﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻮ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺰاﻳﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬اﺣﺮص ﻋﲆ ﻗﺮاءة ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬أو ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬مبﺎ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت )اﳌﺠﻠﺪات( اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫ﺻﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد أﻛرث ﻣﻦ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪/DATA DVD/DATA CD‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أو‬
‫وﺟﻮد أﻛرث ﻣﻦ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻣﺘﺪاد اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪MP3‬‬
‫"‪".mp3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪* WMA‬‬
‫"‪".wma‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪* AAC‬‬
‫"‪".m4a‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫"‪ ".jpg‬أو "‪".jpeg‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪Xvid‬‬
‫"‪".avi‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫"‪ ".mp4‬أو"‪".m4v‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺤﺎول اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺪادات اﻟﻮاردة أﻋﻼه‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا مل ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/Xvid/‬‬
‫‪ .MPEG4‬وﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆدي إﱃ إﺗﻼف ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆدي اﻟﺤﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ إﱃ زﻳﺎدة اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺴﺘﻐﺮق ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪7AR‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎت واﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ُﻣﻌ ّﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪.(International Organization for Standardization) ISO‬‬
‫‪ MPEG1) MP3 (2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ (3‬ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ُﻣﻌ ّﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ISO/MPEG‬ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MPEG1‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.3‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ مبﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ )‪ (Digital Rights Management‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ (4‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ :DCF "Design rule for Camera File system") .DCF‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳري اﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣريات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻤﻬﺎ ‪(.(JEITA) Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ )‪.(CD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺰدوﺟﺔ ‪ DualDiscs‬وﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎت ﺣامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ )‪ .(CD‬وﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻫﺬه اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW‬ﺑﺨﻼف ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ اﳌﺪرﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪5‬‬
‫‪ CD-ROM‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪PHOTO CD‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ‪CD-Extra‬‬
‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD Graphics‬‬
‫‪DVD Audio‬‬
‫‪Super Audio CD‬‬
‫‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ Xvid‬أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎؤﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪Packet Write‬‬
‫‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫‪Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫ﻋﻼو ًة ﻋﲆ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺑﻜﻮد ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(7‬‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ذات ﺷﻜﻞ ﻏري ﻗﻴﺎﳼ )ﻣﺜﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أو ﻗﻠﺐ(‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ورق أو ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎت‬
‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ اﳌﺎدة اﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻟﴩﻳﻂ اﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎن أو ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت‪ ،‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﺠﻮدة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أو اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﳌﺎدﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬أو ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أو ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻹﻧﺸﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ إذا مل ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﻬﺎؤﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن ﺑﻌﺾ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD+RW/DVD+R‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﺗﻢ إﻧﻬﺎؤﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬وﰲ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻼو ًة ﻋﲆ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/‬‬
‫‪ DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎؤﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.Packet Write‬‬
‫‪6AR‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎر اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫• ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫• ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫أو وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ‪ DVD+R/DVD+RW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(VR‬‬
‫• ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪) (VR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪(DVD-R DL‬‬
‫‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫• ‪) VIDEO CD‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.1‬و‪(2.0‬‬
‫• ‪Super VCD‬‬
‫• ‪ CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪CD‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أو ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫• ‪Audio CD‬‬
‫• ‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪DATA CD‬‬
‫–‬
‫• ‪ CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻷﻧﻮاع اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ‪ (1ISO 9660‬ﻣﻦ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ‪/1‬اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ‪،2‬‬
‫أو ‪) Joliet‬اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻤﺘﺪة(‪:‬‬
‫‪(3(2‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪Xvid/MPEG4‬‬
‫‪DATA DVD‬‬
‫–‬
‫• ‪DVD-ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/‬‬
‫‪ DVD+RW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫اﻷﻧﻮاع اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪UDF‬‬
‫)‪:(Universal Disk Format‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪(3(2‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪Xvid/MPEG4‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻷﻧﻮاع اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‪ (3(2MP3‬أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪WMA/AAC‬‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪JPEG‬‬
‫– ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪Xvid/MPEG4‬‬
‫‪5AR‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ‪2 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه‪3 ....................................‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪/‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪5 ............................................................. USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻌﺒﻮة ‪9 ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻷﺟﺰاء وﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪11................................‬‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ إﱃ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪16............................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ :1‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪20...................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪25...................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ :3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪31.....................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪34.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪34.............. USB‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮى‪37........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪40.............................................‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮيك ‪43..............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪45.....................USB‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮن‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ‪47..........................................................‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪48...............................‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻟﻠﺮادﻳﻮ ‪48.....................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼمئﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺆﺛﺮ اﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‪50...................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪51.................................... "BRAVIA" Sync‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﻏﺎين إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪53.................................... USB‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‪56.............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﺑني اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﺼﻮت‪56............................‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺒﺚ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد‪57................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﺴﺘﻮى دﺧﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ ‪57....‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪58.........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪58...................‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪58..........Quick Setup‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ‪58.................‬‬
‫إﺟﺮاء اﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪59.....................................‬‬
‫‪4AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ‪66..................................................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎف اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ وﺣﻠﻬﺎ ‪68.......................................‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪75.............................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‪79..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ أﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ اﳌﻌﻨﻴني‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬه‬
‫• اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه ﺗﺼﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛام ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌامل ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ وﺣﺪة إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﺳامء أو أﺳامء ﻣامﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌامل "‪ "DVD‬ﻛﻌﺒﺎرة‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD VIDEO‬و‬
‫‪ DVD+RW/DVD+R‬و‬
‫‪.DVD-RW/DVD-R‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪3AR‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ – اﺳﺘﻌامل أدوات ﺑﴫﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻌني‬
‫ﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ إﱃ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺿﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰاﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺐ أو اﻟﺨﺰاﻧﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺿﻤﻨًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﺣﺘامﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺠﺮاﺋﺪ أو ﻣﻔﺎرش‬
‫اﳌﻨﻀﺪة أو اﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ‪ ،‬إﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻣﺼﺎدر ﻟﻬﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺸﻤﻌﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ أو ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮات أو ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ اﳌﺎء‪،‬‬
‫وﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﺷﻴﺎ ًء ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺰﻫﺮﻳﺎت‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت أو اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻟﺤﺮارة زاﺋﺪة‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ أو‬
‫اﻟﻨﺎر أو ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺣﺪوث إﺻﺎﺑﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﲆ اﻷرﺿﻴﺔ‪/‬اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم ﺣﺴﺒام‬
‫ﺟﺎء ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌامل ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ اﳌﺒﻨﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﺼﻨّﻒ ﻛﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ .CLASS 1 LASER‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫"‪ "DVD-RW‬و"‪"DVD-R‬‬
‫و"‪ "DVD+RW‬و"‪"DVD+R‬‬
‫و"‪ "DVD VIDEO‬وﺷﻌﺎرات "‪"CD‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ مبﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﳌﱰدد‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ إﻃﻔﺎء اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• مبﺎ أن اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﱃ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﱰدد ميﻜﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻻﺣﻈﺖ أي ﳾء‬
‫ﻏري ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻓﻮ ًرا‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮة‬
‫إﺷﺎرات داﺋﺮة اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ‪ Dolby* Digital‬وﻧﻈﺎم‬
‫‪ Dolby Pro Logic‬وﻧﻈﺎم ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DTS** Digital‬‬
‫‪.Surround System‬‬
‫* ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ مبﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪.Laboratories‬‬
‫‪ Dolby‬و‪ Pro Logic‬ورﻣﺰ ‪ D‬اﳌﺰدوج‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫** ﻣﺼﻨﻊ مبﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺮاءة‬
‫اﺧﱰاع أﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ أرﻗﺎم‪5,451,942 :‬؛‬
‫‪5,956,674‬؛ ‪5,974,380‬؛‬
‫‪5,978,762‬؛ ‪ 6,487,535‬وﺑﺮاءات‬
‫اﺧﱰاع أﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ وﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ أﺧﺮى ﺻﺎدرة‬
‫وﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ‪ُ .‬ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ DTS‬واﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻼﻣﺘني‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺘني ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘني و‪DTS Digital‬‬
‫‪ Surround‬وﺷﻌﺎرات ‪ DTS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪ DTS, Inc.‬ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ © ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ DTS, Inc.‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺤﻘﻮق ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪High-Definition Multimedia‬‬
‫)‪.Interface (HDMITM‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬وﺷﻌﺎر ‪ HDMI‬و‬
‫‪High-Definition Multimedia‬‬
‫‪ Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ أو‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ Licensing LLC‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة‬
‫وﺑﻠﺪان أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪2AR‬‬
‫"‪ "BRAVIA‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫"‪ "PLAYSTATION‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪Sony Computer‬‬
‫‪.Entertainment Inc.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻔري اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MPEG‬اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬وﺑﺮاءات اﻻﺧﱰاع ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ Fraunhofer IIS‬و‪.Thomson‬‬
‫ُﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Windows Media‬إﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ أو ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة و‪/‬أو اﻟﺪول اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻘﻮق ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .Microsoft‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ أو ﻧﴩﻫﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﻧﻄﺎق ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫دون اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﴫﻳﺢ )اﻟﺘﺼﺎرﻳﺢ(‬
‫اﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﳌﻌﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﴫي ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮاءة‬
‫اﻻﺧﱰاع ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌامل اﻟﺸﺨﴢ‬
‫وﻏري اﻟﺘﺠﺎري ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺷﻔﺮة‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻧﺴﺠﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻌﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﴫي‬
‫)"‪MPEG-4 ("MPEG-4 VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻔريﻫﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ وﻏري ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ و‪/‬‬
‫أو ﻛﺎن ﻗﺪ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪MPEG LA‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .MPEG-4 VIDEO‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻳﺠﻴﺰ‪ ،‬أو ﻳﺪل ﺿﻤﻨًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﲆ‪ ،‬أي اﺳﺘﻌامل آﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌامل ﻷﻏﺮاض ﺗﺮوﻳﺞ اﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎت‬
‫واﻻﺳﺘﻌامل اﻟﺪاﺧﲇ واﻟﺘﺠﺎري واﻟﱰاﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ميﻜﻦ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .MPEG LA, LLC‬راﺟﻊ ‪HTTP://‬‬
‫‪WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising